JP2020099826A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of easily avoiding inconvenience caused by occurrence of power failure regarding a game ball entering a specific area in which a game state advantageous for a player is generated.SOLUTION: In the case where a predetermined power failure state in which a power failure signal is confirmed continuously three times is detected by power failure monitoring processing S9202 and during a period including an approach enabled period in which an approach enabled state is generated for actuating a changeover solenoid such that a game ball can enter a specific passage TA, a main control board executes control for progressing a special game state. Therefore, even in a situation where a power failure state is generated, during a fixed period including the approach enabled period, the special game state is progressed and a situation where a game ball that is going to enter the specific passage TA is prevented from entering the specific path TA by the occurrence of power failure can be avoided.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 40

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows entry of a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player who plays a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a specific area. There is known a gaming machine that provides a gaming state that is advantageous to (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-028117, A

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if a state where a game ball can enter a specific area occurs, if a power failure occurs at that timing, the opportunity for turning becomes invalid and the player is disadvantageous. There was a possibility of suffering. Further, there is a possibility that a criminal may intentionally stop supplying power to the game machine and unjustly make a profit.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, there is provided a gaming machine capable of easily avoiding the inconvenience caused by the occurrence of a power outage when a gaming ball enters a specific area in which a gaming state advantageous for a player is generated. The purpose is to do.

In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more easily established than a normal gaming state when a predetermined winning condition is established, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In the gaming machine configured as
A distribution mechanism capable of distributing game balls to a plurality of regions including a specific region and capable of generating an enterable state in which the game balls can enter the specific region in at least a part of the plurality of rounds,
A switching mechanism that is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and that can switch whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side,
An operation control means for performing control including operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control means for generating a more advantageous specific game state than when the game ball does not enter the specific area,
A power failure detecting means for detecting whether or not a predetermined power failure state is present,
A power failure control means for performing a predetermined power failure response control when the predetermined power failure state is detected by the power failure detection means,
Display means for displaying a result of a predetermined lottery including a lottery result regarding execution of the special game state,
Display control means for controlling display contents of the display means,
As the special game state, a first special game state and a second special game state in which the probability that a game ball enters the specific area is higher than that of the first special game state are provided.
The power outage control unit detects the power outage as the predetermined power outage response control in a predetermined period including a period in which the predetermined power outage state is detected by the power outage detection unit and causes the approachable state. Executing a predetermined control for advancing the special game state after the predetermined power failure state is detected by means,
When the predetermined power failure state is detected by the power failure detection means when the distribution mechanism is controlled to generate the approachable state, the control of the display means by the display control means is performed by the special game. It is possible to stop prior to the predetermined control for advancing the state, and after the predetermined control is performed, it is possible to stop the control of the control board that controls the shooting of the game ball. I am trying.

With the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of easily avoiding the inconvenience caused by the occurrence of a power failure with respect to the entry of the gaming ball into a specific area that produces a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in still another open state Pachinko machine front view Front view of the pachinko machine with the front block removed Front view of the game board Back side perspective view of the pachinko machine Rear view of a pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flowchart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Explanatory diagram for explaining a unit game for which the reach display of the decorative symbol is definitely or selectively generated in the probability variation game state Explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the internal state in the probability variation gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution of the unit game for which the reach display of the decorative symbol is definitely and selectively generated in the probability variation game state Explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution of the unit game for which the reach display of the decorative symbol is definitely or selectively generated in the probability variation game state Explanatory drawing for explaining reach production in the probability variation gaming state Flowchart showing an example of special symbol related processing in the main control interrupt processing Flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variation start process in the special symbol related process Flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol generation process in the special symbol variation start process Explanatory diagram showing parameters for associating the jackpot symbol random number value and the symbol identification value Explanatory diagram showing the correlation between the big hit symbol random number value and the symbol identification value and the special game state mode Explanatory diagram showing an operation for generating a stop symbol identification value from the symbol identification value Explanatory diagram showing replacement of the stop symbol identification value when the stop symbol identification value is within a predetermined value range Explanatory diagram showing the correlation between the symbol identification value and the stop symbol identification value and the light emission pattern Flowchart showing an example of the starting winning process in the special symbol related process Flowchart showing an example of the hold information output setting process in the start winning process Flow chart showing the progress of the gaming state Specification explanatory diagram of the game state Diagram illustrating the relationship between the progression of time and the number of balls acquired in the probability variation gaming state Diagram showing the flow-down path on the right side of the game area Structure explanation drawing of winning device unit Illustration of operation control of the winning device unit Timing chart showing the main operation of the winning device unit Operation explanatory diagram of the winning device unit Flowchart showing an example of timer update processing Flowchart showing an example of processing during the upper prize winning allowance Flowchart showing an example of processing during prohibition of upper prize Explanatory drawing of the mechanism which makes a game ball enter into the specific passage|path which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows an example of the power failure monitoring process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing of a lower prize winning apparatus according to a third embodiment

Regarding the embodiment of the game machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball game machine, which is a kind of game machine, will be described, and then a modified example and other kinds of game machines will be described. First, regarding the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes will be sequentially described.

<Structural composition>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows a front block 102 and an intermediate block 103 integrated with an outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Shows. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. Various wirings are omitted in each drawing, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and these parts are relatively operated by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting unit that supports the main body of the pachinko machine 100. The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a substantially quadrilateral frame in which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left side plate portion 113, and a right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into a game machine installation facility (island facility) provided in a game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). In addition, in the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101 has the same inner shape, and a main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 is provided. The island equipment may be provided with a part of a supporting mechanism that supports the locking mechanism and a locking mechanism that locks the main body of the island mechanism.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (on the left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (connected) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation front end side.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided, for example, as shown in FIG. 1, at the upper end and the lower end of the outer frame 101 so as to be separated from each other. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101 supports the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 from below, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. When the plug is inserted, it is configured to be rotatable. The configuration in which the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above-described configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined detaching operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. In contrast, it is detachably attached. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined detaching operation of opening the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a certain amount. It As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the middle block 103, and the middle block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 rotatably forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove it by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the middle block 103, and the middle block 103 and the rear block 104 are separated by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same structure as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so as to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. Moreover, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined detaching operation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, an intermediate block locking mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism and a front block locking mechanism. A lock operation mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

As a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, when a right rotation operation is performed by an operation key (not shown), the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is disengaged from the movable portion 143, and the intermediate block 103 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is activated in response to a leftward rotation operation on the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is disengaged from the movable portion 144, and the front block 102 is placed in the open/close permitted state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism that restricts opening/closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. With this rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism, the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103 can be switched between a state in which opening/closing is prohibited (opening/closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening/closing is permitted (opening/closing permitted state) by a predetermined operation. It is said that.

The rear block opening/closing restricting mechanism is configured by, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, two opening/closing restricting portions 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening/closing restricting portion 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. The three opening/closing restricting portions 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change a state of engagement with an opening portion arranged to overlap front and rear in the closed state of the rear block 104 by the rotation operation, whereby an open/close prohibited posture corresponding to the open/close prohibited state. And an opening/closing allowable posture corresponding to the opening/closing allowed state can be switched. When all the turning pieces 151A to 151C are set in the opening/closing allowable posture, the turning pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the openings, and the rear block 104 enters the opening/closing allowed state with respect to the intermediate block 103. The open/close prohibited posture and the open/close permitted posture may be switched between the open/close prohibited state and the open/close permitted state by changing at least one of the positions and the orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and is configured to rotate only at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a fixed direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members of each device move between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed in the rear block 104 in the open/close prohibited state of the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the open/close permissible postures only by an operation from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, and thus, the crime prevention performance is achieved. Has been raised.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement restricting mechanism that restricts the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement restriction mechanism is configured by a combination of a flow-down restriction piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a restriction change portion 162 provided in the front block 102. The downflow restricting piece 161 is configured to be biased by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down restriction piece 161 is in a movement-allowed state that allows the flow of the game ball, and specifically, the restriction. The changing portion 162 pushes and pushes the intermediate block 103 rearward. The flow-down restriction piece 161 is arranged rearward with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement permitting state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the front block 102 is in the open state), the pressing of the flow-down restricting piece 161 by the restriction changing portion 162 is released, and compared to the closed state of the front block 102. As a result, the flow restricting piece 161 is set in a movement prohibited state in which it projects toward the front block 102. The flow-down restriction piece 161 projects into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and blocks the flow of the game ball to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

In the pachinko machine 100, as shown in FIG. 2, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front end side (left side in rear view). An open/closed detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the intermediate block is provided is provided, and as shown in FIG. An open/close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided for 103.

Next, the configurations of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be sequentially described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is composed mainly of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and a plurality of functional parts are attached to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front surface side of the base frame 201, a front decoration 210 that forms the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A that includes the front view central portion of the front block 102. It has been installed. In the state where the base frame 201 that constitutes the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210</b>A is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction over a wide area excluding the outer peripheral portion where the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, It is provided with an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing the game balls, and a firing operation device 250 operated by the player for firing the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, as a part of the front decorative body 210, an opening peripheral portion 211 that surrounds the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a portion that protrudes forward on the lower side of the opening 210A. Upper protruding portion 217, a lower protruding portion 218 located below the upper protruding portion 217 and protruding forward, an upper protruding portion 217 on the right side of the lower protruding portion 218, and a lower protruding portion. A flat portion 219, which is formed in a generally flat region located on the inner side of 218 and in which the firing operation device 250 is disposed, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is arranged on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged on the lower protrusion 218.

The central panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visible while closing the opening 210A penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction when the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 are combined. The center panel 220 includes, for example, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201, and a light transmissive member fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. Front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) that is light-transmissive and is fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221 substantially in parallel with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing the game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent from the game hall. The main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 1, a storage portion 231, a ball removing mechanism (not shown), and a ball removing operation member 232 that operates the ball removing mechanism. In the storage section 231, an inlet 231A for allowing the game ball to flow from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 to the storage section 231, and an outlet (not shown) for allowing the game ball to flow from the storage section 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100, A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream of the outflow port is provided. By opening this discharge port, the game ball is discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removal mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outflow port and the discharge port.

The game ball obtained according to the progress of the game and the game ball lent out in accordance with the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage section 231 through the inflow port 231A. In addition, the storage portion 231 is formed with an opening on the upper side, and through this opening portion, a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted, or a game ball that is lent at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage portion 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the outlet are formed (the upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a line. When the ball removing operation (for example, the pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 232 is not performed, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation member 232 is performing the ball removing operation, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage part 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) of the game ball and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1), and the discharge port 241B. A ball-removing mechanism 243 for causing the ball-removing mechanism 243 and a ball-removing operation member 242 for operating the ball-removing mechanism 243 are provided. The game balls and the like acquired in accordance with the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage portion 231 is full, it flows into the storage portion 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, even in response to the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball flows into the storage section 241 from the storage section 231 through the inflow port 241C.

The bottom surface of the storage section 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removing operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage section 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. In addition, when the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 242, the discharge port 241B remains in the open state until a return operation (for example, a pressing operation again) is performed on the ball removing operation member 242. Maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241 is provided at the back of the inflow port 241A.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the firing operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the firing handle 252, and a firing handle 252 It includes a firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) for invalidating the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotationally operated by the player, a game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) at a strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the firing handle 252 and the player, or if the firing operation is invalidated by operating the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 is being rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launch device 330.

Further, behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap with the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral portion 211 includes an upper center edge portion 211A, an upper left side edge portion 211B and an upper right side edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides of the upper side center edge portion 211A, and an upper left side edge portion. It has a left side edge portion 211D positioned below 211B and a right side edge portion 211E positioned below the upper right side edge portion 211C as light emitting portions, and frame light emission is performed corresponding to each light emitting portion. Devices 271-275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271-275 include an upper central frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge part 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge part 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting corresponding to the upper right side edge part 211C. The device 273, the left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and the right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E are configured. Each of the frame light-emitting devices 271-275 is a light-emitting diode (LED) as one or a plurality of light-emitting means, an electronic component such as a resistor for controlling the LED, and these electronic components are integrated and electrically connected. And a printed circuit board.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 5, for example, an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G are provided above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F are provided. A left upper acoustic device 281 and a right upper acoustic device 282 (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 10) are provided corresponding to the respective upper right acoustic output ports 211G. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located at the back (rear) of the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 1, for example, a game ball lending device 290 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the upper protrusion 217. The game ball lending device 290 is a frequency display device 291 for displaying numerical values according to the balance of bills, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending It includes a lending operation device 292 that is operated by the player when receiving the money, and a return operation device 293 that is operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, and the like inserted in the card unit. When a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit and the numerical values corresponding to those amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. Accordingly, a predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated along with the renting of the game balls. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, an equivalent of a banknote corresponding to the balance or a card in which the balance is recorded is returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows a player to perform an input operation different from the shooting operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a push operation device 261 that can perform a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up/down/left/right direction operation. With these operation devices 261-263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and the light amount of each device executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player. It is possible to execute information setting operation that allows you to enter the information and execute the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the game before the previous time, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game hall as needed. It is said that. The input operation unit with which the player contacts the input operation device 260 (for example, an annular rotation operation unit of the rotation operation device 262) is rotated, moved up and down by an input operation unit drive unit such as a motor or a solenoid, or It is preferable that the operation such as the vibration is configured to be executable by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10 )), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation, or By operating the input part at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effect accompanied by the input operation, such as positively prompting the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104, a function of bringing the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 into an integrated state. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and the base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on a command from the main control device 370, a launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) that ejects, a main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) that is mounted on the back side of the game board 400 and integrally controls the progress of the game. And a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effect and status notification.

In the base frame 301, as shown in FIG. 3, a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding a game ball discharged from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed, A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and the plurality of wirings inserted into the opening 301B are various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, the frame light emitting device 271 to 271). 275, the upper left audio device 281 and the upper right audio device 282) and the devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 or the rear block 104 for electrical connection. The signal relay device 311 including the wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 is a flat plate-shaped base body 401 having through holes through which game balls such as a discharge port 401A can pass forward and backward, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base body 401. 402, an inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the base body 401, a return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and an upper right end of the outer rail 402. The recoil prevention member 405 is attached. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball shot from a launcher 330, which will be described later, into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed in the portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 face each other in parallel, and returns to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property that prevents a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, for example, it is formed of a material such as a damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the outer rail 402 and the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 to the launching path 401B, and the launching device 330 launches it but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning in the passage 401B is returned to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below this gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) while falling within the game area by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is partitioned into a shape having a region having a front-back width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball as the majority. The outer peripheral portion of the game area is defined by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is defined by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220 into a substantially planar shape, and the rear side is defined by the base 401 of the game board 400 in a substantially planar shape. It is divided into Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launch device 330 includes a ball feed mechanism 331 that sequentially sends the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to a launch position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). (See), a firing mechanism 333 for ejecting the game ball arranged at the firing position, a firing solenoid 334 (see FIG. 10) for driving the firing mechanism 333, and a game ball fired from the firing mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing path 401B. The firing device 330 operates according to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 as described above, and the drive control of the firing solenoid 334 is changed according to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 to adjust the firing force.

As shown in FIG. 4, main controller 370 includes main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and board case 371 having a two-part structure that houses main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a translucent board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

The main controller 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, the mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. Thereby, not only the back side (front surface side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back surface side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 on the game board 400. It can be easily confirmed with it attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a two-part structure that houses the sub-control board 940. Like the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 is housed inside a light-transmissive board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

Here, in the game board 400, various structures arranged in the game area will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base body 401, a flow-down changing member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412 that changes the flow-down direction or flow-down speed of a game ball, and a central portion arranged substantially in the center of the base body 401. The structure 420, the starting device according to the first special symbol arranged below the central structure 420 (specifically, the upper middle starting prize winning device 431A and the lower middle starting prize winning device 431B), and the center. A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) according to a second special symbol arranged on the lower right side of the structure 420, and a big winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432. , 434 (specifically, the lower-winning prize device 433 and the upper-winning prize device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right starting winning device 432, and the game board 400. The winning combination operation device 435 arranged on the upper right side and above (upstream side) the upper and lower big winning devices 433, 434, and the general winning device 439A arranged on both left and right sides of the lower middle starting winning device 431B. , 439B.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting passage of a game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned upper middle starting winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10), corresponding to each switch. The entry of the game ball into the predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle-start prize switch (upper middle-start prize switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle-start prize device 431A, a middle-start prize switch that detects a game ball that has entered the lower-middle start prize device 431B (lower Side middle start winning award switch 441B), right starting winning award switch 442 for detecting a game ball entering the right starting award winning device 432, lower large award winning switch 443 for detecting a game ball entering a lower large award winning device 433, upper large award winning device Upper prize winning switch 444 that detects a game ball that has entered 434, a winning combination operation switch 445 that detects a game ball that has entered a winning combination operating device 435, a start switch 446 that detects a gaming ball that has entered a starting device 436, and a lower position A non-specific passage switch 447 that detects a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage TB (see FIG. 32(A)) formed inside the special winning device 433, a specific passage TA formed inside the lower special winning device 433 A specific passage switch 448 for detecting a game ball entering (see FIG. 32(A)), a general prize switch 449A, 449B for detecting a game ball entering each of the general prize devices 439A, 439B, etc. are installed on the game board 400. ing.

The central structure 420 and the entrance part of the game ball of the starting device 436 constitute a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area. The game of each winning device, specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, the upper big winning device 434, and the general winning devices 439A, 439B. The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game balls that have entered each winning opening are guided through a through hole formed in the base 401 to a collecting and discharging passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. .. In addition, the game balls that have not entered the respective winning devices are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream side portion of the game area. The game ball guided to the collecting and discharging passage is discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulating device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or a device in which two or more winning devices (for example, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) are integrated. The winning device may be configured by the above, and a starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball enters. The ball may be used as a ball entrance that is released again into the game area without being paid out.

The upper middle starting winning a prize device 431A and the lower middle starting winning a prize device 431B which relate to the 1st special design, and each general winning a prize device 439A and general winning a prize device 439B do not change the entry probability of the game sphere to those, entry Guide the game ball to the back side of the base 401. In addition, the right start winning a prize device 432 which relates to the 2nd special design has the mechanism which changes the entry probability of the game sphere inside that. The mechanism for changing the probability of entering the game ball does not have to be provided only in the starting device for the second special symbol, and instead of or in addition to it, the starting device for the first special symbol, a general winning device. It may be provided in one or more of 439A and 439B. Further, the mechanism for changing the entering probability of the game ball may be constituted by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball entering a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanism that operates mechanically.

The right start prize winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is a right entry regulation mechanism 452 that changes the entry probability of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry permission posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the right entry regulation mechanism. And a right entry restriction solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives 452. The right entry regulation mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry regulation solenoid 462. When the right entry regulation mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces enter the entrance (the winning opening). ) Is narrowed (or closed), the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry restriction mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, the two movable pieces have their tips. The game ball can enter the right start winning device 432 by arranging such that the interval between the parts is enlarged. The right-entry restricting mechanism 452 is the right-entry when the player has won a lottery based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 relating to the normal symbol is detected by the start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as "ordinary symbol lottery"). In response to the drive by the restriction solenoid 462, the approaching posture is changed a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower-large prize winning apparatus 433 has a lower-entry restricting mechanism 453 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the inside by a transition between the allowable-entry attitude and the prohibited-entry attitude, and a lower-entry restriction. The lower entry restriction solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the attitude of the mechanism 453, and the transition between the non-guided attitude and the guided attitude allows the game ball that has entered the lower special prize device 433 to be in the non-specific path TB or the specific path. A distribution mechanism 601 that distributes to TA and takes an entrance permitted attitude and an entrance prohibited attitude with respect to a specific passage TA, and a switching solenoid 465 that changes the attitude of the distribution mechanism 601 to switch the guidance destination of the game ball (see FIG. 10). ) And are provided. When the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 of the lower big prize device 433 is in the entry prohibited posture, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning hole), so that the game ball cannot enter the lower big prize device 433. When the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the lower prize winning apparatus 433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the big winning device 433 is guided to the non-specific path TB when the sorting mechanism 601 is in the non-guided posture in which it projects forward, and the guided posture in which the sorting mechanism 601 sinks in the rear. If it is, the vehicle is guided to the specific passage TA. The specific passage TA, the non-specific passage TB, and the distribution mechanism 601 are provided for diversifying the transition of the game state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage TA, a game state advantageous as a privilege to the player. Is given.

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning apparatus 434 has an upper entry regulation mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry permitted posture and the entry prohibited posture, and the top entry regulation. An upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibited posture, the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning hole) so that the game ball cannot enter the upper special winning apparatus 434, but the upper entry regulation mechanism 454. Is in the entry permission posture, the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the upper prize winning apparatus 434.

In addition, as the entry allowable posture and the entry prohibited posture as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball into the inside of the right entry regulation mechanism 452, etc., each mechanism is configured to form a winning opening (or a ball entrance) of each device. Corresponding to the posture change of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and direction of the operating member differs depending on each posture. I wish I had it. Further, as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball such as the right entry regulation mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter to the normal state, and the entry of the game ball is permitted even in the normal state, In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 when a lottery for a big hit is won. Specifically, the game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning prize device 431A or the lower middle starting prize winning device 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle starting prize winning switch 441A or the lower middle starting prize winning switch 441B. If you win the lottery based on (also referred to as "first special symbol lottery" below), or that the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right starting winning switch 442. When the lottery based on (hereinafter also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”) is won, at least one of the lower entry regulation solenoid 463 and the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry permitted posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times. Further, the distribution mechanism 601 shifts to the guide posture in response to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time has passed from the shift of the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 to the approach allowable posture, and further after a predetermined time from the shift to the guide posture. When the switching solenoid 465 is stopped, it returns to the non-guided posture.

The winning combination operation device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower-winning prize device 433 and the upper-winning prize device 434 to start operating. After winning the big hit lottery, on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 has passed, either the lower big winning device 433 or the upper big winning device 434 starts operating. Therefore, if the player wins the big hit, the player can start the special game state at the timing intended by the player. Incidentally, it is not always necessary that either the lower big prize device 433 or the upper big prize device 434 starts the operation on the condition that the game ball of the winning combination operation device 435 has passed, and instead of that, or In addition, it may be configured that either the lower-winning prize device 433 or the upper-winning prize device 434 starts its operation after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, on the game board 400, as shown in FIG. 7, display devices 471 to 473 for displaying variable display of symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 for displaying the number of times games are held are integrated. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in the lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are preliminarily divided into light emitting areas corresponding to the respective devices, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, along with the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is variably displayed, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. With the special symbol display device 471 relating to the special symbol and the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol is variably displayed, or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. Special symbol display device 472 related to the special symbol, special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times the unit game related to the first special symbol is held, and special symbol hold that displays the number of times the unit game related to the second special symbol is held A display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol are respectively reserved up to four times. Here, the unit game is a one-time game executed based on one start winning, and a lottery determination based on the lottery determination based on the one start winning It refers to a series of games including from the start to the end of variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the starting prize device 431 is the upper middle starting prize switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle starting prize switch. Even if detected by 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the right starting prize device 432 is detected by the right starting prize switch 442 (see FIG. 10). Also, the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is expressed by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (light off, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol are the number of holding times depending on the combination of the light emitting states (light off, lighting, blinking) of the two single-color light emitting units. indicate.

Further, in the game board 400, with the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol is variably displayed, or the normal symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result, and the normal symbol is related. A normal symbol hold display device 478 that displays the number of times the right to hold a unit game is held is provided. The right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

The normal symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). Usually, the design is expressed by the light emitting patterns of the plurality of light emitting units. Further, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of hold times by a combination of the light emitting states (light off, light, blink) of the two single color light emitting units.

Further, on the game board 400, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the decorative symbol is variably displayed or the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided. The variable display and final display of the decorative symbols are controlled by the sub-control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and various effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display and confirmed display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and confirmed display of the decorative symbol are not always changed at the same timing, or the stopped display is displayed as the confirmed display. It is not necessary to set, and it is also possible to set such that a fixed display is performed at substantially the same timing by starting the fluctuation at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game under the control of the sub control board 940. Various light emission effects and status notification by light emission are executed.

Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter also abbreviated as "normal game state") is a state in which the variable display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter also referred to as "non-time saving state"). Correspond.

If you win the big hit in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage TA (internal passage of the lower big winning device 433) during the special game state that shifts based on the winning. Depending on whether or not to do, the game state to be transferred after the special game state is different. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA during the special game state, the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol and the variation display time of the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state (hereinafter, "hour saving" It is also referred to as "state"), and the winning state of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same state as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "low probability state") (Hereinafter also referred to as "time saving game state"). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage TA during the special game state, it is a time saving state, and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than in the normal game state. A state (hereinafter also referred to as a “high probability state”) is shifted to a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a “probability variation gaming state”).

The time saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but thereafter, it returns to the normal game state. In addition, the probability variation game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), but then returns to the normal game state.

Note that the game state and the transition between the game states do not necessarily have to have the above-described configuration, and for example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit, or the above-mentioned game state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a game state different from each of the above-mentioned game states may be further included, and a configuration in which the game states are shifted by a condition different from the above-described condition may be adopted.

Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. In the main control board 920, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, and various fluctuation pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various game states. In the case where the game ball that has entered one of the starting prize winning devices 431A and 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by any of the middle starting prize winning switches 441A and 441B (see FIG. 10), the starting prize of the first special symbol Becomes At the time of starting winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number, the winning random number, the big hit symbol random number and the stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are acquired, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game by the random number acquired based on the starting winning of the first special symbol is not in the special game state and is not in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the unit game relating to the first special symbol. If the right of is not reserved, it starts immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even when not in the special game state, when the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved After the end of the unit game related to all special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) that were held before the current prize, the unit game based on the present starting prize is started. When each random number is obtained based on the starting winning of the first special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the starting winning of this time after the special gaming state. It is started after the unit game relating to the special symbol.

In addition, the unit game by the random number acquired based on the starting winning of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is obtained based on the starting prize of the second special symbol after the present starting prize, the unit game based on the starting prize of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. The unit game based on the starting prize of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be configured to be executed in preference to the unit game of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in order of the starting prize. The unit predominant control according to may be executed, or the two special symbols may not be alternative but may be changed at the same time.

When the big hit in the first special symbol lottery based on the start winning of the first special symbol, if the jackpot winning of the first special symbol lottery based on the obtained jackpot symbol random number, the stop symbol ( The type of jackpot pattern) is determined. The type of this stop symbol corresponds to the type of jackpot, for example, the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture, or A plurality of types of big hits are set corresponding to the types of game states such as a game state (whether or not to shift to a probability variation game state) after the special game state, and a big hit symbol is set for each type. When the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the big hit symbol is set as the stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, based on the current game state, lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of various fluctuation pattern random numbers, the number of times the right to hold the unit game related to the first special symbol, the first special The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the variable display (variation effect) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 479 are started, and the variation occurs in the first special symbol. The variable display is continued in a fixed pattern over the display time, and in the decorative pattern, the variable display according to the change pattern is continued over the variable display time. After that, with the passage of the variable display time, the stop symbol relating to the first special symbol is fixedly displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is fixedly displayed as the decorative symbol. The fixed display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

If the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, after the fixed display of the first special symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state. In the special game state, the lower entrance control mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper entrance restriction mechanism 454 of the upper prize winning device 434 are allowed to enter a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 443 and 444 in each of the allowable entry postures of the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454, or a predetermined maximum. When the allowed entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibited posture. After that, after the elapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 returns to the entry permitted posture again. This approach restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

Only one of the lower approach regulation mechanism 453 and the upper approach regulation mechanism 454 is allowed to enter the special game state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) One shifts to) to the first approach allowable posture. In addition, the special game state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed from the final return to the entry prohibition posture and after a predetermined standby time has elapsed (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, the state shifts to the time saving game state or the probability variation game state.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the right starting prize device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right starting prize switch 442, the starting prize of the second special symbol is obtained. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control relating to the above-mentioned first special symbol. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number at the time of starting winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired, and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. To be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variable display, and the game state transition control, etc. are executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol. To be done.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not retained up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, the data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if it is not during the unit game related to the normal symbol, immediately after the storage, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the already-acquired normal symbol ends.

In the unit game relating to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the player has won based on the value of the winning random number, and if the player has won, a predetermined hit symbol is set as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time saving state, the variable display is continued in a fixed pattern for a predetermined variation display time, and in the time saving state. The variable display with a constant pattern is continued for a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With the lapse of a predetermined time according to the gaming state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a winning symbol, after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 of the right starting winning device 432 shifts to the entry permission posture at least once. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 seconds). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving game state and probability variation game state), a predetermined maximum allowable entry time longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state (for example, about 4.8 seconds). ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to shift to the entry permission posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start prize switch 442, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibited posture without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time to elapse. Also, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game relating to the present normal symbol is completed even if the number of times of transition to the entry permissible posture has not reached the predetermined number.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, you must win in the normal symbol lottery, further, the game ball enters the right start prize winning device 432 in the entry permitted state of the right starting prize winning device 432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time saving gaming state, but the stay time in the entry permissible state of the right starting winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, Since 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time in the time saving state (for example, about 4.8 seconds), in the normal gaming state, an opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery. Is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. On the contrary, in the time saving state such as the time saving game state or the probability variation game state, the opportunity per unit time that the second special symbol lottery can be received is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time that the first special symbol lottery can be received. ..

Therefore, the player wins the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, aims to shift to the probability variation game state by entering the game ball into the specific passage TA. On the other hand, in the time saving game state and the probability variation game state, the game is aimed at winning the big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

Specifically, in the game board 400, a central structure 420 is provided in the center of the game area where the game balls flow down, and a game method (left-handed game) in which the game balls flow down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420. Method) and a game method (right-handed game method) in which the game ball is mainly flown down from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively selected. In the normal game state, the player plays the game by the left-handed playing technique, and in the time saving game state and the probability variation gaming state, the player plays the game by the right-handed playing technique. Further, since the lower big prize device 433 and the upper big prize device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, a game is performed by a right-handed game technique even in the special game state.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the base body 501. The base block 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game balls (for example, in one row) on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 and the game balls tank 510 as a ball storage unit that stores the game balls and aligns them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment section, a case rail 530 as a ball guide section for guiding a game ball flowing from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a payout of the game ball on the downstream side of the case rail 530. A payout device 540 that rents out game balls, and a guidance as a ball guide portion that guides the game balls flowing out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 for controlling the payout of game balls and a lending of game balls by the payout device 540, and a power supply for converting external electric power into electric power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputting the electric power. A power supply/launch control device 570 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the launch of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operating device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920, and a payout control device 560. The game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a relay device 950 that relays a signal between a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100 are provided.

The base body 501 is integrally molded of resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front portion and a protective cover portion 503 located rearward of the base portion 502. The base portion 502 has an upper portion formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and a lower portion formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, to which other devices are attached. It has a function as an attached part.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but covers a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103, such as a part of the main control device 370, which needs frequent inspection and confirmation, to the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. The size is set so as to form a window portion for exposure to. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of vent holes 503A having a function of improving the heat radiation performance of the main controller 370 and the sub controller 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the game ball tank 510 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island facility. An opening (not shown) is formed at one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side where the game balls are supplied in the game ball tank 510. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game balls supplied to the game ball tank 510 move to the opening side by their own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction (front-back direction) orthogonal to the longitudinal direction as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, on the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached so as to overlap therewith, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 that forms a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width that allows the game balls to pass in a line, and the height gradually increases as the upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. It has a rectifying member 522 that has a top surface portion that lowers and gradually rectifies the game balls that flow down the passage from a vertically overlapping height to a one-step height. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side and guides the game ball to the opposite side of the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is formed vertically so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows in. On the case rail 530, the game balls are curved left and right so as not to flow vigorously and continue downward. Further, a storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) for detecting a ball break is attached to a middle portion of the ball passage of the case rail 530. The storage ball switch 591 detects a ball out condition in which a game ball is not normally replenished in the case rail 530 due to a ball clogging or the like occurring on the case rail 530 or the upstream side thereof.

The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for delivering the game balls, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a drive unit for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are discharged to the downstream side. Passage of the released game balls through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game balls.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply/launch control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap with the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be positioned at the lower back surface side of the rear block 104. Has been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply/launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that accommodates the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave a trace of unsealing, like the main control board 920. It is housed inside a substrate case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply/launch control device 570 includes a power supply/launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a substrate case that houses the power/launch control board 900. The power/launch control board 900 is similar to the main control board 920. And is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power/launch control board 900, a power monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that, in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Below, these major control circuit devices will be described individually in detail.

The power supply/launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power of a predetermined voltage to each unit of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launching device according to the operation of the launching operation device 250. A firing control unit 902 that controls the drive of 330 and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249 are provided.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external electric power (for example, AC 24 V) supplied from the outside, converts it into internal electric power (for example, DC 24 V), and generates various kinds of electric power from the internal electric power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is electric power of a drive voltage (for example, DC 12 V) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, drives various switches, and executes control processing. It also includes power for a control voltage (for example, DC 5 V) for changing the voltage, power for a backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various kinds of power generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power supply monitoring board 910 is supplied with the internal power, the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage. Electric power of a drive voltage, a control voltage, and a backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 920, and these electric powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Electric power of a drive voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with electric power of a drive voltage and a control voltage. Electric power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the firing control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the off state, the acquisition of external power is stopped. Note that the power switch 909 is turned off, or the power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 through the power switch 909 is pulled out from an external power supply outlet (not shown). A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a “power failure state”.

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. Accordingly, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so as to return to the current control state.

The firing control unit 902 cooperates with the main control board 920 to control the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 of the firing device 330. The ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the fact that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping the firing is provided. The firing control unit 902 outputs a firing permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920 on condition that the firing control unit 902 is not operated. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feeding solenoid 332 based on the ball feeding control signal in the ON state, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the firing solenoid control signal in the ON state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let As a result, the game balls are sequentially fired from the firing device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. In the main control board 920, the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is initialized in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay section 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the substrate case 371, which can prevent an illegal signal input aiming at a section where a signal is transmitted.

In addition, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. In the main control board 920, the low speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the low speed payout signal determines the rotation speed of the payout motor 542 (the payout speed). The payout speed of the game balls from the device 540 is reduced. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a high speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 which has received the high speed payout signal determines the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

The power supply monitoring board 910 performs power supply and transmission of various signals between the power supply/launch control board 900 and the main control board 920, and a power supply monitoring section 911 that monitors a power supply state from the power supply/launch control board 900. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined to be the power failure state, and the power failure signal in the ON state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 integrally controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. An MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 920. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. And a RAM (not shown) for storing the like. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown), etc. are mounted on the main control board 920. There is. The RAM of the main control board 920 is configured to be able to maintain (backup) the internal data by the power supply of the backup voltage from the power supply/launch control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

The payout control board 930 controls the payout operation of the game balls by the payout apparatus 540 according to the instruction from the main control board 920 and the payout operation of the game balls by the payout apparatus 540 according to the operation of the game ball lending apparatus 290. The payout control board 930, like the main control board 920, includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown) are mounted. The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input/output port as a connecting means for connecting information communication with other devices, and for example, bidirectional information input/output communication with the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 is possible. The open/close detection switches 108 and 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 are connected so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is only one-way information. Only output communication is possible. Like the RAM of the main control board 920, the RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period in a power failure state, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike the above, the internal data may not be maintained in the power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls operations of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various audio devices, and the like, based on an instruction from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input/output port as a connecting means for connecting to another device so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. The input operation device 260 is bidirectionally connected so as to be able to communicate information, and the decorative design display device 479 and the like are connected so that only one-way information output communication is possible.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 is roughly divided into a main processing that is activated upon recovery from a power failure state and a main processing that is interrupted periodically (in this embodiment, at a period of 2 ms (milliseconds)). Timer interrupt processing.

First, the main processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processing (program start processing S1001 to random number initial setting processing S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information is executed only once. , After that, interrupt prohibition process S1020 for prohibiting interruption, and a winning random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM) and a jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM) related to special symbols and ordinary symbols A random number initial value updating process S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the RAM), and a first variation type counter to a fourth variation type for determining a variation time, a variation pattern, and the like. The fluctuation counter updating process S1022 for updating the value of the counter (a part of the RAM) and the interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting the interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request is issued before the interrupt permission process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permission process S1023.

In a series of control start processing, a program start processing S1001 that sets an initial value to a stack pointer (a partial area of RAM) that controls the execution of the program, an interrupt mode setting processing S1002 that sets an interrupt mode, and a payout control board. A startup standby process S1003 that waits for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like start up is executed.

After the startup standby process S1003, a determination process S1004 of the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply/launch control board 900, a determination process S1005 of the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM), and a storage Information storage state determination processing S1007 is performed, and it is determined whether or not to delete the stored information in the RAM based on the determination results. Here, the saved information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power outage, and corresponds to a partial area of the RAM that has been updated according to the progress of the game before the power outage, and is executed. The value of the counter regarding the unit game in the inside, the value of the counter stored by the start winning, and the like are exemplified.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation processing S1006), and the current checksum value and power failure monitoring processing S1202 (see FIG. 12) accompanying the transition to the previous power failure state. ), it is determined whether the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value, is “0” (determination processing S1007). It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not the predetermined power failure value indicating that the saving information has been saved and completed at the time of the transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or the saving If the information is not normally retained (S1007:N), the RAM clear processing S1008 that erases the stored information in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed, a hardware that initializes various devices connected to the main control board 920. Wear initialization processing S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, a process S1010 of determining whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010:N), the RAM recovery setting processing S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the retained information and the recovery command indicating the completion of the setting are set (recovery command Output process S1012). By the restoration of the held information in the RAM restoration setting processing S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, if the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010:Y), various information is initialized without restoring the retained information (RAM initialization processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM restoration setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error statuses such as fraud detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure status. Even if occurs, all of those error states are canceled. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 which have received the return command or the initialization command. In each of the above, a predetermined initialization process is executed.

After the initial setting (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014) of the RAM according to the situation at the time of startup, if the condition device was operating at the time of the transition to the previous power failure state, the special game state is set. Preparations for returning are made (special game state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operation states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and the process corresponding to the game situation during the power failure state is executed in the sub control board 940. It

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state flag is set or not by determining whether the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and the time saving state is established. In this case (S1016:Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016:N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output processing S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (partial area of the RAM) relating to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, the power failure monitoring processing S1202 to external information output processing S1221 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors is sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various injustices (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt permission process S1222 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various types of main processing will be individually described.

In the power outage monitoring process S1202, the value of the power outage information (a part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power outage signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the ON state is detected for all three times, it is determined to be the power failure state. If it is not determined in this determination that the power is in the power failure state, the power failure information is maintained at the energization value.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power outage monitoring process S1202 that there is a power outage, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM restoration setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. In addition, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the two's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not perform substantial control such as progress of a game or monitoring of various sensors, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. It Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each processing of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the ordinary symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value larger than the current value by "1", and the special symbol is changed. If the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circulation initial value for the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. And the cyclic initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value of each counter, a unique value is set for each counter, and multiple counters are updated asynchronously. Refers to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter relating to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter relating to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range, The winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol have the same value range.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter for special symbols, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter for ordinary symbols are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and the special value is changed. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Also for the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are peculiar values to those counters, the winning random number initial related to the special symbol It is updated as in the case of the value counter.

In the fluctuation counter updating process S1205, the values of the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first fluctuation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and the first fluctuation When the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to these counters. To be done.

In addition, the winning random number counter, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selecting counter, and the variation type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have to have the above-described configuration, and at least a part of the counter may be configured as another configuration. For example, it may be configured to update from a fixed initial value without using the initial value counter, or may be configured to use a random number generation IC without using a program and refer to the value as needed. ..

In the game stop determination processing S1206, when the fraud detection information is the fraud detection value, the game stop value is updated and various kinds of information for stopping the progress of the game are set. On the other hand, when the fraud detection information is not the fraud detection value or is already the game stop value, each process for stopping the game progress is not executed and the game stop determination process S1206 ends. The fraud detection information is set to the fraud detection value when various fraud occurrences are detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. Further, in the determination processing S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol Normally, signals for controlling various notification devices such as the symbol display device 473 are output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approach regulation solenoid 462, a lower approach regulation solenoid 463, an upper approach regulation solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are operated. A control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the medium start prize winning switches 441A and 441B, the right start prize winning switch 442, the lower prize winning switch 443, the upper prize winning switch 444, the winning combination operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, and the specifying passage The signal state from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B is read, and a change in the detection state of the game ball by various switches is detected.

Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. For each of the following, a signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and a signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) A change in the detection state of various switches is detected based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, the first signal state is the on state, and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is the on state. Then, a detection flag (a partial area of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. As described in the power outage monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the ON state of various switches immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when it is started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined area of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each gaming state, and fraud monitoring are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, a fraudulent act such as forcibly entering a game ball into various prize winning devices or forcibly operating various prize winning devices is detected. Specifically, the right start winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, and the upper big winning device 434 are forcibly moved to the allowable entry postures, and the game balls to the specific passage TA of the lower big winning device 433 by vibrating. Induction, induction of forcible malfunction of the right start winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434 by radio waves, induction of game balls to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, upper middle starting winning device 431A It is highly possible that an illegal act such as guiding a game ball to the lower middle starting prize device 431B, the right starting prize device 432, the lower big prize device 433 and the upper big prize device 434 at an abnormal timing has been performed. To detect the occurrence of.

In the winning detection response processing S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the medium start prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the upper middle start prize switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle start prize switch 441B (see FIG. 10). In the middle start prize winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the right start prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right starting prize winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower big prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower big prize switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the game ball is detected by the upper big prize switch 444 (see FIG. 10). When the upper prize switch detection flag is set based on this, the special prize counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the second payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated.

In the firing control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launching device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, an intermediate block for the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) based on the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. It is detected whether 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is compared with the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). It is detected whether (see 3) is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands corresponding to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to perform notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and is decremented by 1 each time a prize ball command based on the winning is set. In the payout control board 930, a prize is awarded to the main control board 920 every time the control for paying out the number of game balls (for example, three) corresponding to the winning is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). When the ball command is requested and the payout of the prize balls is continued, the main control board 920 outputs a further prize ball command. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in correspondence with a prize (for example, 13) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is paid out. When 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related processing S1217, the suspension control of the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game according to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower big winning device The operation control of 433 and the special winning apparatus 434 is further executed.

Further, in the special symbol-related processing S1217, the suspension control of the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Also, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower big winning device The operation control of 433 and the special winning apparatus 434 is further executed.

In the normal symbol related processing S1218, the control of holding the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game relating to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol in the special symbol related process S1217, the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, the special symbol holding display device 476 relating to the first special symbol, and Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 or the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is combined. The combined output data is output to each device in the next control signal output process S1208 based on the timer interrupt.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Generation mode of reach effect in probability variation game state>
The occurrence modes of the reach effect in the probability variation gaming state and matters related to them will be collectively described in detail. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a unit game in which the reach display of the decorative symbol is definitely or selectively generated in the probability variation gaming state, and FIG. 14 is for explaining the transition of the internal state in the probability variation gaming state. FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the distribution of the unit games for which the reach display of the decorative symbol is definitely or selectively generated in the probability variation game state, and FIG. , Is an explanatory diagram for explaining a reach effect in the probability variation gaming state.

First, the mode of transition of the gaming state will be described. In the normal game state, a game is played with the aim of causing the game ball to enter the upper middle starting winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B. Then, the first special symbol lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the upper middle start winning prize device 431A or the lower middle starting prize winning device 431B, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, The special winning state in which the special winning apparatus 433 and the special winning apparatus 434 are operated is entered. In this special game state, when the game ball enters the specific passage TA (see FIG. 32(A)) formed inside the special winning device 433, a predetermined number of unit games after the special game state (this embodiment) If the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, a certain number of times (40 times, 60 times or 80 times in the present embodiment) as a unit after the special game state. It becomes a time saving game state over the game. Further, in the probability variation game state or the time saving game state, a game is played aiming to enter the game ball into the right start winning device 432. Then, the second special symbol lottery is performed on the basis of the game ball entering the right starting winning device 432, and if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery before the unit game of the predetermined number of times is finished, As in the case of winning the first special symbol lottery, the special variation state is followed by the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state. In the probability variation game state or the time saving game state, when the unit game of a predetermined number of times is completed, the normal game state is returned to.

Next, the control when the big hit is won by the first special symbol lottery will be described. When the big hit is won by the first special symbol lottery, the special game state mode is determined based on the value acquired from the big hit symbol random number counter. Specifically, when the value obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "0" to "181", it becomes a short-term (6 rounds in this embodiment) special game state with a small number of continuous rounds, and the value is In the case of "182" to "479", it is a long-term (16 rounds in this embodiment) special game state with a large number of continuous rounds.

Moreover, the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol is determined as the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is identified by an 8-bit value, and is determined by a predetermined calculation based on the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter. Each bit of the 8-bit value for identifying the stop symbol is associated with each light emitting unit of the symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol composed of eight light emitting units, and the stop symbol is the value of the bit. Is displayed by turning on the light emitting unit when is "1" and turning off when "0".

Further, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 479 is determined based on the values acquired from the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the jackpot symbol relating to the decorative symbol is finally confirmed and displayed via the reach display. In addition, as a variation pattern of the decorative pattern when the jackpot is not won, if roughly classified, a pattern in which the lost pattern related to the decorative pattern is finally displayed without passing through the reach display (hereinafter, “Loss”) There is also a pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a "reach lost pattern") that is passed through the reach display and finally the lost pattern relating to the decorative pattern is definitely displayed.

After that, the special game state is started, and the lower special prize device 433 and the upper special prize device 434 are appropriately operated. In this special game state, when the game ball enters the specific passage TA (see FIG. 32(A)) formed inside the lower prize winning device 433 and the game ball is detected by the specific passage switch 448, After the game state, the probability variation game state is achieved over 100 unit games, while if the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, a predetermined number of times (40, 60 or 80 times in this embodiment) after the special game state. It becomes a time saving game state over a unit game of (time). In the long-term special game state in which the value obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "240" to "479", if the game ball is continuously launched by right-handing, the game ball is transferred to the specific passage TA. Can be entered, and after the special game state, the probability variation game state is entered. On the other hand, if the value is any other value, the game ball cannot be entered into the specific passage TA even if the right-handed game ball is continuously launched, and the time-saving game state is set after the special game state.

When transitioning from the special gaming state to the probability variation gaming state, based on the value obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter, identify the transition pattern of the internal gaming state that controls the selection of the variation pattern in the probability variation gaming state after the special gaming state The value (pattern number) to be set is determined. Specifically, as a value for identifying a transition pattern, when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "240" to "359", "1" to "120" are set, respectively, Also in the case of "360" to "479", "1" to "120" are set respectively. As a result, various transition patterns are evenly selected. In the time saving game state (the value obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "0" to "239"), a transition pattern different from that in the probability variation game state is selected.

Next, the control when the big hit is won by the second special symbol lottery will be described. When the big hit is won by the second special symbol lottery, the mode of the special game state is determined based on the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter. Specifically, if the value obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "0" to "239", it becomes a short-term (6 rounds in this embodiment) special game state with a small number of continuous rounds, and its value. Is from "240" to "479", it is a long-term (16 rounds in this embodiment) special game state with a large number of continuous rounds.

Moreover, the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is determined as the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery. The stop symbol related to the second special symbol is identified by an 8-bit value and determined by a predetermined calculation based on the value obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter, as in the case of the stop symbol according to the first special symbol. To be done. Further, as in the case of the stop symbol related to the first special symbol, each bit of the 8-bit value for identifying the stop symbol related to the second special symbol is related to the second special symbol composed of eight light emitting units. The stop symbol is associated with each light emitting unit of the symbol display device 472, and the stop symbol is displayed by turning on the light emitting unit when the bit value is "1" and turning off when the bit value is "0". ..

Further, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 479 is determined based on the values acquired from the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the jackpot symbol relating to the decorative symbol is finally confirmed and displayed via the reach display.

After that, the special game state is started, and the upper special prize device 434 and the lower special prize device 433 are appropriately operated. In this special game state, as in the special game state related to the first special symbol, the game ball enters the specific passage TA (see FIG. 32(A)) formed inside the lower prize winning device 433, and the game concerned. When the ball is detected by the specific passage switch 448, it becomes a probability variation game state over 100 unit games after the special game state, while if the game ball has not entered the specific passage TA, after the special game state. It becomes a time saving game state over the unit game of 40 times, 60 times or 80 times according to the stop symbol of the second special symbol. However, unlike the special game state related to the first special symbol, when the launch of the game ball by right-handing is continued, regardless of the value of the big hit symbol random number counter, the game ball can enter the specific passage TA. It is possible, and after the special game state, it becomes the probability variation game state. During the transition from the special gaming state to the probability variation gaming state or the time saving game state, based on the value obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter, the transition of the internal gaming state that controls the selection of the variation pattern in the probability variation gaming state after the special gaming state A value that identifies the pattern is determined. Specifically, as a value for identifying the transition pattern, when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "0" to "479", four values are set to "1" to "120", respectively. For example, when the values obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter are “0”, “120”, “240” and “360”, the value for identifying the transition pattern is set to “1”.

Next, a game in the probability variation game state will be described. The probability variation game states are further classified into five kinds of internal game states internally, and the transition patterns are, as shown in FIG. 14, the probability variation state A, the probability variation state B, the probability variation state C, the probability variation state D. And a probability change state E. Each of the probability variation state A to the probability variation state E are common in that the jackpot is selected with a higher probability than in the normal game state or the time saving game state in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery), The manners of selecting effects on the decorative symbol display device 479 are different. In the probability variation state A, one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns as the variation pattern. Further, in the probability variation state B, one reach-miss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach-miss patterns as a variation pattern. Further, in the probability variation state C, one reach-miss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach-miss patterns at a rate of 50%, and one loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of loss-pattern at a rate of 50%. Further, in the probability variation state D, the loss pattern is selected as the variation pattern as in the probability variation state A, and the possibility of shifting to the specific mode display is selected by lottery. Further, in the probability variation state E, similarly to the probability variation state A, a lost pattern is selected as a variation pattern, and a process for ending the probability variation game state is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, based on the transition pattern selected from 120 types of transition patterns (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the main control board 920), the variation of the reach-miss pattern is deterministic. Remaining number of unit games to specify the unit game to be generated in ("determined reach occurrence remaining unit game number" in the figure) and the unit game to selectively generate the variation of reach loss pattern by lottery A unit game number (“lottery reach occurrence remaining unit game number” in the figure) is set. Thereby, the internal game state in the specific game state, as shown in FIG. 14, in the unit game from the first unit game to before the unit game in which the reach loss pattern fluctuates definitely, in the unit game, the probability variation state A ( In the figure, the control is simply executed according to "A". In the unit game in which the reach loss pattern changes deterministically (hereinafter, also referred to as the "determined reach generation unit game"), control according to the probability variation state B (abbreviated as "B" in the figure) is executed. It Further, in the unit game from after the unit game in which the reach loss pattern fluctuates definitely to before the unit game in which the reach lose pattern fluctuates selectively, the probability variation state A is again established. In addition, in the unit game in which the variation of the reach lose pattern occurs selectively (hereinafter, also referred to as "lottery reach generation unit game"), control according to the probability variation state C (simply abbreviated as "C" in the drawing) is executed. It Further, in the unit game after the unit game in which the reach loss pattern is selectively generated and before the final unit game, control according to the probability variation state D (simply abbreviated as "D" in the drawing) is executed. Further, in the final unit game, control according to the probability variation state E (simply abbreviated as “E” in the figure) is executed.

Here, a description will be given of a presentation mode on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the probability variation game state. In the probability variation gaming state, on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, as shown in FIG. 17, in addition to the symbol display area 481 for displaying the decorative symbol, the remaining number indicating the number of remaining unit games in the probability variation gaming state. A display area 482 is formed. For example, in the 45th unit game in the probability variation game state, "55" is displayed as the number of remaining unit games. Further, a reach-related information display area 483 that represents the type of reach effect and indirectly indicates the number of times of the reach effect is formed. Specifically, in the reach-related information display area 483, a left display unit 483L corresponding to the reach effect by the first character having a low jackpot expectation and a right display unit corresponding to the reach effect by the second character having a high jackpot expectation. 483R and a central display portion 483M corresponding to the reach effect by the third character in which the big hit is confirmed. Note that, until the first reach effect occurs, each of the left display portion 483L, the right display portion 483R, and the central display portion 483M is displayed brightly.

From the first unit game to the unit game before the fixed reach generation unit game, the special jackpot is not won in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery), and the jackpot is not won in the fixed reach generation unit game. In this case, the reach display of the first decorative design is performed in the design display area 481, and finally the lost design is fixedly displayed. In accordance with this reach display, one of the reach effect by the first character and the reach effect by the second character is selected, and the selected reach effect is executed. In addition, when the reach effect by the first character is selected, the left display portion 483L is darkened, while when the reach effect by the second character is selected, the right display portion 483R is darkened. When the jackpot is not won, the reach effect by the third character does not occur.

Furthermore, in the case where the lottery reach generation unit game is reached without a big hit, and the lottery reach generation unit game is not a big hit, and when the reach generation lottery is won, in the symbol display area 481. The reach display of the second decorative design is performed, and finally the lost design is confirmed and displayed. Along with this reach display, a reach effect by a character different from the character selected in the first reach display occurs, and the right display unit 483R corresponding to the reach effect by the character selected in this reach display. Alternatively, the left display portion 483L goes dark. On the other hand, in the lottery reach generation unit game, when the reach generation lottery is not won, the reach display of the second decorative symbol does not occur in the symbol display area 481 and the reach effect is not executed. After that, if you reach the final unit game without winning the jackpot, and if you do not win the jackpot in the final unit game as well, no further reach display will occur and reach production will be executed. Nor.

When the big hit is won in the unit game from the first unit game to the fixed reach occurrence unit game, the reach display of the first decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display area 481, and finally the jackpot symbol is displayed. Confirmed display. In the unit game that wins the jackpot, the reach effect by the first character, the reach effect by the second character, or the reach effect by the third character is selected. In addition, when the big hit is won in the unit game from the final reach generation unit game to the lottery reach generation unit game, the second reach display is executed, and finally the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. In the unit game that wins the jackpot, a reach effect by a character different from the character selected in accordance with the first reach display or a reach effect by a third character is executed. Also, when the jackpot is won in the unit game from the lottery reach generation unit game to the final unit game, if the reach effect is executed in the lottery reach generation unit game in the symbol display area 481, the third The second reach display is executed, on the other hand, if the reach effect is not executed in the lottery reach generation unit game, the second reach display is executed, and finally the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. In the unit game that wins the jackpot, the reach effect by the third character is always executed in the case of the third reach display, and in the case of the second reach display, the first decoration The reach effect by the character not selected in the reach display of the symbol or the reach effect by the third character is executed.

Here, the transition pattern will be described. In each probability variation game state, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in each unit game is determined according to the transition pattern selected from 120 types of transition patterns in which the combination of the fixed reach generation unit game and the lottery reach generation unit game is different.

In each transition pattern, as shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15(A), in the fixed reach occurrence unit game, the remaining unit game number is within the range of “87” to “46”, and “77”, Allocated to unit games other than "66", "64", "50" and "55". The fixed reach occurrence unit game is frequently assigned to the unit game in which the remaining unit game number is near "77". Further, in the lottery reach generation unit game, as shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15B, the remaining unit game number is within the range of “68” to “13”, and “67”, “66”. , “64”, “62”, “60”, “59”, “56”, “55”, “50”, “45”, “44”, “36”, “34”, “33”, “ Allocated to unit games other than 23” and “22”. Therefore, from the first unit game in which the remaining unit game number is "99", in the 10th unit game in which the remaining unit game number is "90", in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery) When the jackpot is not won, the reach display of the decorative symbol is not displayed in the symbol display area 481. On the contrary, when the reach display of the decorative symbol occurs in those unit games, it is decided that the big hit is won. Similarly, from the 91st unit game in which the remaining unit game number is "9", in the final unit game in which the remaining unit game number is "0", when the jackpot is not won, the symbol display The reach display of the decorative design is not performed in the area 481, and when the reach display of the decorative design occurs in those unit games, it is determined that the big hit is won. In addition, the 12th and 23rd which the remaining unit game number is "88", "77", "66", "55", "44", "33", "22" and "11" (doublet) In the unit game of the 34th time, the 34th time, the 44th time, the 56th time, the 67th time, the 78th time and the 88th time, if the jackpot is not won, the reach display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the symbol display area 481. If the reach display of the decorative design occurs in those unit games, it is determined that the big hit is won.

Further, in each transition pattern, as shown in FIG. 13, at least 10 times (minimum 10 times in this embodiment: pattern 113) unit game is performed after the fixed reach generation unit game and before the lottery reach generation unit game. Intervenes. Similarly, at least 10 times (minimum 12 times in this embodiment: patterns 55, 77, 105) of unit games are interposed after the final reach generation unit game until the final unit game. Therefore, in the unit game 10 times or less after the unit game in which the reach display of the decorative symbol occurs, if the jackpot is not won, the reach display of the decorative symbol is not performed in the symbol display area 481. When the reach display of the decorative design occurs in those unit games, it is decided that the jackpot is won. Further, the lottery reach generation unit game is not assigned to the 33rd, 44th, 55th, 66th, 77th and 88th unit games, so in these unit games, If the jackpot is not won, the reach display of the second decorative design is not performed in the design display area 481, and the reach display of the second decorative design is generated in those unit games. Is confirmed to have won the jackpot. The number of unit games from the start of the probability variation game state is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but can be confirmed by a data display device (not shown) provided along with the pachinko machine 100.

Further, in each transition pattern, in a predetermined unit game, for example, a unit game in which the number of remaining unit games and the number of unit games from the start of the probability variation game state are "36" representing the name (thumb) of the third character, If the jackpot is not won in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery), the reach display of the decorative symbol is not performed in the symbol display area 481.

Further, in the 120 types of transition patterns, as shown in FIG. 15(A), the fixed reach occurrence unit game is frequently assigned to the nearby unit game in which the remaining unit game number is “77”. , The frequency is assigned so that the frequency decreases as the number of unit games moves away from "77". Therefore, the jackpot expectation in the unit game in which the reach display of the first decorative pattern has occurred is low in the unit game in which the remaining unit game number is near "77", and as the remaining unit game number is away from "77". Get higher As a result, the jackpot expectation when the reach display of the first decorative pattern occurs can be changed for each remaining number of unit games. Further, as shown in FIG. 15B, the lottery reach generation unit game is a unit game in the vicinity where the remaining unit game number is "55", "44" or "33" (particularly "33"). Assigned frequently. Therefore, the jackpot expectation in the unit game in which the reach display of the second decorative design has occurred is low in the unit game in which the number of remaining unit games is near "55", "44" or "33", and the remaining unit game. The number increases as it moves away from "55" toward the smaller side, and as it approaches the intermediate value between "55" and "44" ("49") or the intermediate value between "44" and "33" ("39"). The number of remaining unit games increases as the number of remaining unit games increases from “55” to the larger side. As a result, the jackpot expectation when the reach display of the second decorative pattern occurs can be changed with a unit game of about 5 times as a cycle.

Further, in the 120 types of transition patterns, as shown in FIG. 16, the allocation range of the fixed reach generation unit game and the allocation range of the lottery reach generation unit game partially overlap, and the fixed reach generation unit game and The lottery reach generation unit game is a certain variation game state in which the remaining unit game number is "87" to "46" except for a predetermined unit game (a unit game in which the number of remaining unit games corresponds to a doublet or a character). Are almost evenly allocated in a predetermined range of the first half of the above, and are also substantially evenly allocated in a predetermined range of the second half of the probability variation gaming state in which the remaining unit game number is "46" to "13". However, since the reach rate of the reach display of the decorative design in the lottery reach generation unit game is 1/2, the reach frequency of the reach display of the decorative design in the latter half is about the frequency of the reach display of the decorative design in the first half. It becomes 1/2. Therefore, in the probability variation game state of each time, in the unit game over the wide range of the remaining unit game number of "87" to "13", the reach display of the decorative symbol is generated almost evenly.

The 120 types of transition patterns are composed of a plurality of combinations of transition patterns in which the number of remaining unit games corresponding to the fixed reach occurrence unit game is the same and the number of remaining unit games corresponding to the lottery reach occurrence unit game is different. ing. Therefore, by the occurrence of the reach display of the first decorative pattern, the unit game in which the reach display of the second decorative pattern may occur cannot be easily estimated.

If the above pachinko machine 100, the unit game in which the reach display of the decorative design is definitely generated in each transition pattern is defined, and the reach of the decorative design is reached even if the jackpot is not won in the probability variation gaming state. The display always occurs once. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which even the reach display of the decorative symbol does not occur in the probability variation gaming state, as in the case where the occurrence of the reach display is determined by lottery for each unit game, and the gaming property in the probability variation gaming state Can be improved.

Further, in the above pachinko machine 100, in each transition pattern, one unit game in which the reach display of the decorative pattern is definitely generated and one unit game in which the reach display of the decorative pattern is selectively generated It is defined that the reach display of the decorative pattern is not generated except for those unit games. Therefore, if the reach display of the third decorative pattern occurs within the 100 unit games in the probability variation gaming state, it will always be a big hit, but as the game in the probability variation gaming state progresses, even if the jackpot is not won, it is decorated. Since the number of times the reach display of the symbol is displayed (once or twice) is always increased, the expectation for the big hit can be amplified as the game progresses. As a result, it is possible to further improve the playability in the probability variation game state.

Further, if the pachinko machine 100 described above, the period during which the variation of the lost reach pattern is controlled by the transition pattern is limited to 100 unit games, and the maximum number of times the variation of the lost reach pattern is selected during the period. Is limited to 2 times. Therefore, depending on the combination of the number of remaining unit games in the probability variation gaming state and the number of times of reach display, it is possible to make the player have different expectation for a big hit.

Further, if the pachinko machine 100 described above, in each transition pattern, the fixed reach generation unit game and the lottery reach generation unit game can be easily set to a desired unit game, and the reach display can be confirmed or confirmed by the desired unit game. It can be generated selectively. Further, in all transition patterns, a predetermined unit game, for example, a unit game less than or equal to the first predetermined number of times, a unit game less than or equal to the last predetermined number of times, a unit in which the number of remaining unit games is a number due to a doublet or a character, etc. From the game, the fixed reach generation unit game or the lottery reach generation unit game to the unit game less than the predetermined number of times, by not assigning the fixed reach generation unit game and the lottery reach generation unit game, the reach display of the decorative symbol in the predetermined unit game is displayed. It can be easily set so that it will be a big hit whenever it occurs. As a result, it is possible to further improve the playability in the probability variation game state.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 100 described above, in all transition patterns, the final reach generation unit game is allocated so that it has a predetermined distribution (see FIG. 15(A)), and the reach display of the first decorative pattern is displayed. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous when the reach display of the decorative pattern occurs because the expectation degree of the big hit when the occurs occurs. In addition, in all transition patterns, lottery reach generation unit games are allocated so as to have a predetermined distribution (see FIG. 15(B)), and the degree of expectation of a jackpot when the reach display of the second decorative design occurs Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous when the reach display of the second decorative design occurs. With these, it is possible to further improve the game playability in the probability variation game state.

Further, if the pachinko machine 100 described above, in all transition patterns, the reach display of the decorative symbols is a unit game in a predetermined range (remaining unit game number "87" to "46") in the first half of the probability variation game state. It occurs almost uniformly in the unit game of the predetermined range of the second half of the probability variation game state that continues to the predetermined range of the first half (the remaining number of unit games is "46" to "13"). As described above, the fixed reach generation unit game and the lottery reach generation unit game are assigned (see FIG. 16). Therefore, in the most range of the probability variation game state (the number of remaining unit games is "87" to "13"), the reach display can be generated as if each of the unit games was randomly selected to generate the reach display. It is possible to maintain the expectation for a big hit. In addition, when the unit game reach display of the predetermined range of the first half part occurs and when the reach display is generated in the unit game of the predetermined range of the second half part, the probability of the jackpot is changed, so the probability change game state It can be suppressed that the game in is monotonous. With these, it is possible to further improve the game playability in the probability variation game state.

Furthermore, the predetermined remaining unit game number corresponding to the fixed reach occurrence unit game is the same, and the transition pattern in which the remaining unit game number corresponding to the lottery reach occurrence unit game is different is one set, and such a transition is made. Multiple sets of patterns are set. Therefore, based on the unit game in which the reach display of the first decorative pattern has occurred, the unit game in which the reach display of the second decorative pattern may occur cannot be easily estimated, and the reach display is always performed. It is possible to continue the game while expecting the occurrence of. As a result, it is possible to further improve the playability in the probability variation game state.

<Display mode of special symbols>
The stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, their display modes, and matters related thereto will be collectively described in detail. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol related process S1217 in the main control interrupt process. Further, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variation start process S1303 in the special symbol related process S1217, and FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol generation process S1404 in the special symbol variation start process S1303.

The stop symbol identification value that identifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the stop symbol of the second special symbol is a predetermined calculation based on the symbol identification value determined according to the jackpot symbol random number value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter. If the calculation result is not within the predetermined value range, it is set to the generated value.On the other hand, if the calculation result is within the predetermined value range, it is generated. It is set to a predetermined value associated with the value. Control to determine the stop symbol identification value based on the acquired value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter, the special symbol variation start process S1303 (see FIG. 18 and FIG. 19) of the special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 12 and FIG. 18) ), the winning determination process S1403 (see FIG. 19) and the stop symbol generation process S1404 (see FIGS. 19 and 20).

In the special symbol-related process S1217, as shown in FIG. 18, in addition to the special symbol variation start process S1303, the upper middle starting winning a prize device 431A (see FIG. 7) and the lower middle starting winning a prize device 431B (see FIG. 7). ) 1st special symbol lottery associated with the entry of the game ball into ), and the start winning process S1301 which executes the control related to the 2nd special symbol lottery associated with the entry of the game ball into the right start winning device 432 (see FIG. 7) Is also done.

Further, the special symbol related state identification value determination process S1302 is executed, using the special symbol related state identification value corresponding to the game state in progress, any of the specific processes constituting the special symbol related process S1217 Is executed.

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation display processing S1304 which executes the control related to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the control related to the fixed display of the stop symbol related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol confirmation display process S1305 to be executed is also executed. Further, a special winning device operation start process S1306 to a special winning device operation stop process S1311 for controlling the operations of the lower special prize device 433 (see FIG. 7) and the upper special prize device 434 (see FIG. 7) in the special game state are also performed. .. In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation start process S1303, as shown in FIG. 19, in addition to the winning determination process S1403 and the stop symbol generation process S1404, for shifting to the next fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol variation pre-setting process S1401 for executing the control, and the special symbol holding data sequential feeding process S1402 for executing the control for changing the holding state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also executed.

Furthermore, the special symbol variation start time setting process S1405 that executes control for starting the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed. In the special symbol variation start time setting process S1405, a variation pattern is selected corresponding to the game state and the above-described transition pattern. According to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern, the main control board 920 controls the display contents of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, and the control command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is sent to the sub control board 940. Send. In the decorative symbol display device 479, the variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display in the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 by the control of the sub-control board 940.

Here, specifically, a method of generating a stop symbol identification value from a jackpot symbol random value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter will be described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing parameters for associating the big hit symbol random number value with the symbol identification value, and FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the correlation between the big hit symbol random number value, the symbol identification value, and the special game state mode. Is. In addition, FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation for generating a stop symbol identification value from a symbol identification value, and FIG. 24 is a stop symbol identification value when the stop symbol identification value is within a predetermined value range. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing replacement, and FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a correlation between a symbol identification value, a stop symbol identification value, and a light emission pattern.

The main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) includes a CPU (not shown) whose basic operation unit is 8 bits, and can perform operations in 8-bit units or 16-bit units. The big hit symbol random number value is stored in a 16-bit area of the RAM (not shown) of the main control board 920, and the range of possible values is a value of "0" to "479", and the first special It is common to the symbol and the second special symbol.

In the winning determination process S1403, when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the big hit symbol random number value is less than the first symbol ratio "172" (the first value in the left column of FIG. 21(A)). Is determined, if the big hit symbol random number value is less than the first symbol proportion, further, the big hit symbol random number value is the first symbol number "10" (the right column of FIG. 21A) It is determined whether it is less than the first value). When the big hit symbol random number value is less than the first number of symbols, the big hit symbol random value is set as the symbol identification value. On the other hand, the big hit symbol random number value is less than the first symbol proportion, but when the big hit symbol random number value is not less than the first symbol number, the first symbol number is repeatedly reduced from the big hit symbol random number value, and the first symbol The value when it is less than the number is set as the symbol identification value. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, when the big hit symbol random number value is "0" to "171", the values of "0" to "9" are repeated in order from the smallest big hit symbol random value. Assigned.

If the big hit symbol random number value is not less than the first symbol proportion, the value corresponding to the first symbol proportion is subtracted from the big hit symbol random number value, and the value after the subtraction is the second symbol proportion "10". It is determined whether or not (the second value in the left column of FIG. 21(A)) is less than, and when the jackpot symbol random number value is less than the second symbol proportion, the value after the subtraction is the first. A value obtained by adding the number of symbols “10” of 1 is set as the symbol identification value. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 22, when the big hit symbol random number value is "172" to "181", the big hit symbol random value is "10" to "19" in order from the smaller one. Is assigned a value of.

Further, if the jackpot symbol random number value after the value corresponding to the first symbol proportion is not less than the second symbol proportion, the value corresponding to the second symbol proportion further from the jackpot symbol random value. The value after subtraction (the value obtained by subtracting the first symbol proportion and the second symbol proportion from the jackpot symbol random number value) is the third symbol proportion "58" (the left column in FIG. 21A). It is determined whether it is less than the third value). If the value after the subtraction is less than the third symbol ratio, the value after the subtraction is less than the third number of symbols “10” (the third value in the right column of FIG. 21A). It is determined whether or not, and if it is less than the third symbol number, the value obtained by adding the sum value “20” of the first symbol number and the second symbol number to the value after the subtraction is the symbol identification. It is set as a value. On the other hand, the value after the subtraction is less than the third symbol ratio, but when it is not less than the third symbol number, the third symbol number is repeatedly reduced from the value after the subtraction, and is less than the third symbol number. The value obtained by adding the total value “20” of the first symbol number and the second symbol number to the value in the case of is set as the symbol identification value. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, when the big hit symbol random value is "182" to "231", the big hit symbol random value is "20" to "29" in descending order. Is repeatedly assigned.

Further, if the big hit symbol random number value after the value corresponding to the first symbol proportion and the value corresponding to the second symbol proportion are not less than the third symbol proportion, further from the big hit symbol random number value The value corresponding to the third symbol proportion is subtracted, and the value after the subtraction (the value obtained by subtracting the first symbol proportion, the second symbol proportion and the third symbol proportion from the jackpot symbol random number value) is the fourth. It is determined whether or not it is less than the symbol ratio “240” (the fourth value in the left column of FIG. 21A). If the value after the subtraction is less than the fourth symbol ratio, the value after the subtraction is the fourth symbol number “120” (the fourth value in the right column of FIG. 21A). It is determined whether or not it is less than, and when it is less than the fourth number of symbols, the value after the subtraction is the sum of the first number of symbols, the second number of symbols and the third number of symbols "30". The value obtained by adding "" is set as the symbol identification value. On the other hand, when the value after the subtraction is not less than the fourth symbol number “120”, the fourth symbol number is further reduced from the value after the subtraction, and the first symbol number, the second symbol value after the subtraction. A value obtained by adding the total number "30" of the number of symbols and the third number of symbols is set as the symbol identification value. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, when the big hit symbol random number value is "240" to "479", the big hit symbol random value is "30" to "149" in descending order. Is repeatedly assigned.

Furthermore, in the winning determination process S1403, when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the symbol ratio and the number of symbols shown in FIG. 21(B). The symbol identification value is derived in the same manner as the case. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol random number value is "0" to "181", the symbol identification value is repeatedly assigned a value "0" to "119" in order from the smallest jackpot symbol random value. If the big hit symbol random number value is "182" to "479", the big hit symbol random number values are assigned to the symbol identification values of "120" to "239" in order from the smallest one. For example, when the jackpot symbol random number value is "0" or "120", the symbol identification value is "0", and when the jackpot symbol random number value is "61" or "181", the symbol identification value is " 61”, and when the big hit symbol random number value is “119”, the symbol identification value is “119”. Further, when the big hit symbol random number value is "182", "302" or "422", the symbol identification value is "120", and the big hit symbol random number value is "239", "359" or "479". In this case, the symbol identification value is "177", and when the big hit symbol random number value is "301" or "421", the symbol identification value is "239".

The symbol identification value is stored in the 8-bit area of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the range of possible values is “0” to “149” for the first special symbol, and the second It is "0" to "239" for the special symbol. Further, the symbol identification value is used to determine the mode of the special game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, when the symbol identification value related to the first special symbol is “0” to “9”, the number of continuous rounds is short (six rounds in this embodiment). The special game state (short-term A in the figure) is set, and after the special game state, the time-short game state continues for a predetermined number of times (40 times in this embodiment) unit game. Further, when the symbol identification value related to the first special symbol is “10” to “19”, it becomes a short-term (6 rounds in this embodiment) special gaming state (short-term B in the figure) with a small number of continuous rounds. , After the special game state, it becomes a time saving game state for a predetermined number of times (60 times in the present embodiment) unit game. Further, when the symbol identification value related to the first special symbol is "20" to "29", it becomes a long-term (16 rounds in this embodiment) special game state (long-term A in the figure) with a large number of continuous rounds. , After the special game state, it becomes a time saving game state for a predetermined number of times (80 times in the present embodiment) unit game. Further, when the symbol identification value related to the first special symbol is “30” to “149”, it becomes a long-term (16 rounds in this embodiment) special gaming state with a large number of continuous rounds (long-term B in the figure). , After the special game state, the certainty variation game state is performed over a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of the unit game. Although not shown, when the symbol identification value related to the second special symbol is “0” to “119”, it becomes a short-term (6 rounds in this embodiment) special game state with a small number of continuous rounds, and a special game. After the state, it becomes a certainty variation game state over a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) unit game. Further, when the symbol identification value related to the second special symbol is "120" to "239", it becomes a long-term special game state with a large number of continuous rounds (16 rounds in this embodiment), and after the special game state. The certainty variation game state is achieved over a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of the unit game. In addition, after a predetermined number of unit games are completed in various time saving game states and various probability variation game states, the normal game state is entered.

Further, the symbol identification value is also used to identify the transition pattern of the internal gaming state for controlling the variation patterns in the probability variation gaming state and the time saving game state after the special gaming state, and particularly in the probability variation gaming state. As a result, as described above, different internal game state transition patterns are assigned to different symbol identification values.

Next, an exclusive OR operation of the symbol identification value and a value obtained by performing a zero padding left bit shift operation four times on the same value as the symbol identification value is executed, and a converted value of the symbol identification value is generated. (Conversion value generation processing S1501: see FIG. 20). In this conversion value, the value of the lower 4 bits is the same as the value of the lower 4 bits of the original symbol identification value, and the value of the upper 4 bits changes based on the value of the lower 4 bits of the original symbol identification value. , The same conversion value is not generated from different symbol identification values.

Next, a reference value is generated by adding the correction value “2(02H)” to the conversion value (reference value generation processing S1502: see FIG. 20). In addition, in the 8-bit addition operation, when "1(01H)" is added to "FFH", it becomes "00H". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 24, "FEH" and "FFH" are added. When the correction values are added, the values "00H" and "01H" different from the normal addition result are taken.

Next, it is determined whether or not the reference value is "5 (05H)" or less (determination processing S1503: see FIG. 20), and when the reference value is "5 (05H)" or less (S1503: Y). 24, the converted value is replaced with different replacement values associated with the six types of reference values (converted value replacing process S1504: see FIG. 20). If the reference value is not equal to or less than "5 (05H)" (S1503: N), the conversion value is not replaced with another value (skipping conversion value replacement processing S1504).

Finally, when the conversion value is "00H" to "03H" and "FEH" and "FFH", the replacement value corresponding to the value is set as the stop symbol identification value, and the conversion value is another value. In some cases, the conversion value itself is set as the stop symbol identification value (stop symbol setting process S1505: see FIG. 20). As a result, as shown in FIG. 25, even in the range of values having continuity in the symbol identification value, the stop symbol identification value becomes a discrete value having no continuity.

Here, the display mode of the stop symbol based on the stop symbol identification value in the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol will be described.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is provided with eight light emitting portions, and each light emitting portion thereof corresponds to each bit in the stop symbol identification value. As shown in FIG. 25, when the value of the bit forming the stop symbol identification value is “1”, it is turned on (the black circle of the light emission pattern in FIG. 25) and the value is “ When it is "0", the light is turned off (white circle of the light emission pattern in FIG. 25).

A mode with the highest distinctiveness in which all the light emitting units are turned on as in the case where the converted value is “FFH”, and the most distinctiveness in which all the light emitting units are turned off as in the case where the converted value is “00H”. The high mode is set to be used when checking the turning on and off of the pachinko machine 100 when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, and is not used to display the stop symbol related to the big hit.

In addition, when the conversion value is “01H” and “02H”, the two right-hand light emitting units are alternately turned on and used to represent the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the big hit. It is set not to be used to display the stop symbol related to. In addition, as the conversion value is “03H”, the mode in which the two light emitting units at the right end are lit is used when the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. It is set so as not to be used to display the stop symbol related to the big hit. As a result, when the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, only the two light emitting parts at the right end are displayed while the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing or the display of the gap is lost. Can be done by

If the pachinko machine 100 described above, in the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, there is a relation with the internal game state (transition pattern) of the probability variation game state. Instead of a high symbol identification value, the internal gaming state of the probability variation gaming state is notified by a light emission mode based on a stopped symbol identification value that has made its relationship diluted. Therefore, depending on the player, from the notification mode by the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, the internal gaming state in the probability variation gaming state, that is, the reach display by the decorative symbol It is more difficult to infer which transition pattern is selected from among the plurality of transition patterns that control the occurrence mode of, as compared with the case where the light emission mode is determined based on the symbol identification value. This makes it difficult for the player to guess how many unit games the fixed reach generation unit game or the lottery reach generation unit game corresponds to in the probability variation game state, and the game performance in the probability variation game state is dramatically improved. To do.

Further, if the pachinko machine 100 described above, in the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, the relationship with the internal game state (the number of continuations) in the time saving game state Is not a high symbol identification value, but the internal gaming state of the probability variation gaming state is informed by a light emitting mode based on the stopped symbol identification value that has made the relationship diluted. Therefore, depending on the player, how many unit games the time saving game state continues from the notification mode by the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol It becomes more difficult to infer that the light emission mode is determined based on the symbol identification value. As a result, the playability in the time saving game state is dramatically improved.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 100 described above, in the generation of the stop symbol identification value, some are excluded (the conversion values are "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H", "FEH" and "FFH". However, since it is generated only by a predetermined calculation based on the symbol identification value, compared to the case of determining only based on the table showing the correspondence between the symbol identification value and the stop symbol identification value, the program capacity It is possible to easily generate various stop symbol identification values without significantly increasing the data volume.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the operation used to generate the conversion value of the symbol identification value is a combination of the zero padding left bit shift operation which is a logical operation and the exclusive OR operation which is a logical operation. In addition, the calculation can be performed at a higher speed than in the case of including the four arithmetic operations. By this, even if the calculation for generating the stop symbol identification value is performed before the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the delay of the start of the variation can be suppressed.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the converted value of the symbol identification value is a value (“00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, “FEH”, and “FEH” that is not desired to be adopted as the stopped symbol identification value. FFH”), those values can be easily excluded by substituting predetermined substitution values based on the table. It should be noted that since only a small number of values that are not desired to be adopted as the stop symbol identification value are replaced based on the table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data capacity necessary for storing the table.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the values that are not desired to be adopted as the stop symbol identification value are distributed in the two separated ranges (“00H” to “03H” and “FEH” to “FFH”). Since the separated ranges are the continuous range including the minimum value “00H” and the continuous range including the maximum value “FFH”, the two separated ranges are made continuous by addition and subtraction of a predetermined correction value. Can be integrated into a range. Therefore, it is possible to collectively determine whether or not the conversion value of the symbol identification value is replaced with a predetermined replacement value, and the control process is simplified. In the pachinko machine 100, the number of values included in the maximum value range (“FEH” to “FFH”) “2” is added to the conversion value to separate the two. The ranges (“00H” to “03H” and “FEH” to “FFH”) are integrated into one continuous range (“00H” to “05H”) including the minimum value.

<Advance production and small hit in the probability variation gaming state>
The pachinko machine 100 is provided with the functions of the preceding effect and the small hit, and the structure of the small hit will be described after describing the structure of the preceding effect.

The preceding effect is an effect that suggests the granting of a privilege in a unit game that has not yet been executed. The preceding effect is an effect on the visual display by the decorative pattern display device 479 or the like, an effect on the tactile sensation caused by the vibration of the firing operation device 250 or the input operation device 260, or an audio output from the audio devices 281 and 282. It is executed by any one or a plurality of devices that stimulate the sense that the player can recognize the situation, such as an effect for hearing. In the following, a case will be described in which the preceding effect is executed using the visual effect on the display, but instead of the preceding effect on the display, or in addition to the preceding effect on the display, other senses may be used. The privilege may be suggested to the player by the preceding effect of operating the device.

In the preceding production, the bonus suggested to the player is given, for example, as a big jackpot win or a small jackpot win that will be given a favorable game state to the player, or a probability variation game state is generated. This type of privilege is a substantial privilege that leads to awarding of prize balls as a game value. Further, the benefits given to the player include a special effect such as a reach effect that expects a big win and a special character such as the appearance of a specific character, and this kind of privilege is a formal privilege to which no game value is given. .. Even if the lottery result of the unit game is lost as a result of the reach production, compared to the unit game without the reach production, the player is expected to partially clear the multiple stages leading to the jackpot win and approach the win It is possible to give a privilege to make people feel.

The preceding effect is executed by determining the content of the unit game that has not yet started to be executed and displaying or outputting the sound corresponding to the content. For example, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the execution of the preceding effect is controlled by controlling the execution setting of the display effect on the main control board 920.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the starting winning process S1301 in the special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 18), and FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the hold information output setting process S1707 in the starting winning process S1301.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the starting winning process S1301, first, it is determined whether or not there is a starting winning of the first special symbol (S1601), if there is a starting winning of the first special symbol (S1601:Y), The prize ball setting process S1602 for updating the value of the payout counter for paying out the prize balls and the prize information output setting process S1603 for outputting to which external device which starting prize winning device has won the prize are executed.

After the processing of S1603, it is determined whether or not the current number of holdings of the unit game is less than 4 and the right of the maximum number of unit games is held (S1604). If it is less than the maximum number (S1604: Y), the information (eg, "3") of the current number of holdings stored in the first symbol holding number storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM) is held for one time. It is updated to the information including the number of times (for example, "4") (S1605).

After the process of S1605, a random number acquisition process S1606 and a pending information output setting process S1607 are performed. In the random number acquisition processing S1606, the winning random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number relating to the first special symbol are associated with the updated information on the number of times of holding the first symbol holding information storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM). To store. In the hold information output setting process S1607, a setting is transmitted to the sub control board 940 so that the hold information including the increase in right of unit game is transmitted to the sub control board 940, and the processing corresponding to the preceding effect is also performed. The hold information set in the hold information output setting process S1607 is transmitted to the sub control board 940 by the external information output process S1221 (see FIG. 12) performed thereafter.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1601 that there is no start winning of the first special symbol (S1601:N), the processes of S1602 to S1607 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1701. Further, in the processing of S1604, if the number of times of holding the unit game is "4" (S1604: N), the processing of shifting to the processing of S1701 is performed without executing the processing of updating the number of times of holding or obtaining a random number.

In the processing of S1701 to S1707, the processing relating to the starting winning relating to the second special symbol is executed, as in the processing of the starting winning relating to the above-mentioned first special symbol (S1601 to S1607). The content of the process is the same as the process related to the first special symbol described above. In the hold information output setting process S1707 as a part of the process related to the second special symbol, a process corresponding to the preceding effect executed during the probability variation gaming state is executed, and for details of this process, refer to FIG. And explain. Since the hold information output setting process S1607 related to the first special symbol is configured by the same process as the hold information output setting process S1707 related to the second special symbol, description thereof will be omitted.

In the suspension information output setting process S1707, as shown in FIG. 27, first, it is determined whether or not the right to the unit game based on the present start winning is suspended (S1801). This determination determines whether the situation is waiting for the establishment of the right of the unit game in the probability variation game state or the situation in which the right of the unit game is suspended while the unit game is being executed. Done.

When the unit game is immediately executed without the right of the unit game being held (S1801:N), a normal hold command is set (S1802), and the hold information output setting process S1707 ends. In the situation where the start prize is generated in the start prize process S1301 in which the current hold information output setting process S1707 is executed, the unit game is immediately started in the probability varying state, and thus the privilege is given in the unit game. Since it is not necessary to suggest by the preceding effect, the hold information output setting process S1707 is ended without passing through the processes of S1805 and subsequent steps for executing the preceding effect. It should be noted that the processing of S1801 may be omitted and the processing of S1803 and thereafter may be executed even in a situation where the unit game based on the start winning is immediately executed. In this case, the program can be simplified. ..

When the unit game right is reserved (S1801:N), it is determined whether or not the big hit occurrence information is stored in the big hit information storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM) (S1803).

The big hit information storage unit is an area for confirming the presence or absence of the big hit occurrence information, and is composed of, for example, a 1-bit flag (big hit storage present flag). As the big hit memory existence flag, it is turned on when there is a unit game in which the value of the winning random number counter corresponding to the big hit is stored in the unit game being executed and the unit game which has already been started and has not been executed yet. The big hit occurrence information is stored, and the flag that is turned off and the big hit occurrence information is erased when the unit game corresponding to the big hit winning is finished is illustrated.

In the processing of S1803, when the big hit occurrence information is stored (S1803: Y), a normal hold command is set (S1802), and the hold information output setting processing S1707 ends. If the jackpot occurrence information is stored, the gaming state may shift from the probability variation gaming state to the special gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state may be started by the new transition pattern selected in the jackpot. If a unit game accompanied by such a change in the game state is being executed or the right of the unit game is already reserved, the preceding effect of the unit game established after that may differ from the actual content of the unit game. There is a nature. Therefore, the pending information output setting process S1707 ends without passing through each process of S1805 and subsequent steps for executing the preceding effect.

In the process of S1803, if the big hit occurrence information is not stored (S1803: N), it is determined whether the number of remaining unit games is larger than "0" (S1804), and if the number of remaining unit games is "0" ( (S1804: N), the normal hold command is set (S1802), and the hold information output setting process S1707 ends. This is because if the number of remaining unit games is “0”, the game state is not in the probability variation game state, and each process for executing the preceding effect in the probability variation game state is not necessary. Even when the number of remaining unit games is "0" (S1804: N), the processing after S1805 may be executed. In this case, a gaming state different from the probability variation gaming state (for example, normal Even in the game state), it is possible to execute a leading effect for a big hit or a reach occurrence.

In the process of S1804, when it is determined that the number of remaining unit games is larger than "0" (S1804: Y), the current number of remaining unit games is extracted from the unit game number storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM), The current number of times of holding is subtracted from the remaining number of unit games to calculate the target number of times, and the information corresponding to the target number of times (for example, the target number of times itself) is stored in the target number of times storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM) (S1805). ).

After the processing of S1805, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S1806: Y), and if it is not variably displayed, it corresponds to “1 time” as the number of times of object stored in the number of times of object storage section. The number of additions is set as a new target count, and information corresponding to the target count is stored in the target count storage unit.

Here, in the pachinko machine 100, in the special symbol confirmation display process S1305 (see FIG. 18) for stopping the variable display, the remaining unit game number in the unit game number storage unit is updated, and the variable display is continuously executed. In such a situation, the target number of times stored in the target number of times storage unit and the actual number of remaining unit games match. On the other hand, in the situation where the execution of the unit game is waiting (for example, during the fixed stop of the variable display or the special game state), the unit game to be executed first among the held unit games (that is, the first held game). Although the unit game) corresponds to the first unit game in the number of remaining unit games, if the number of holding times is subtracted as the target number of times in the process of S1805, a deviation of one time occurs between the number of target times and the number of remaining unit games. obtain.

The processing of S1806 and S1807 is processing for correcting the number of remaining unit games of the unit game for which the present starting winning is achieved, which is the target of the preceding effect, and thereby accurately counts the number of times of target, and one remaining unit. Since only the number of games is stored in the unit game number storage unit and the target number of times corresponding to the number of holdings and the number of remaining unit games in execution can be used in the control of the main control board 920, comparison is made when the number of times is stored separately. Then, it is possible to reduce the chances of causing a deviation between the stored number of remaining unit games even in a moment of control. Therefore, the timer interrupt process and the main process are mixed, and the debugging of the program in each situation where the process at the time of power failure etc. occurs is simplified, and the accurate process is realized by using the storage unit with a small capacity. be able to.

The update of the number of remaining unit games in the unit game number storage unit does not necessarily have to be the timing of ending the variable display, but may be the timing of starting the variable display, or the end of the game related to the unit game (for example, It may be the timing at which the processing of the fixed stop ends, or the timing at which the special game state based on the big hit in the case of a unit game that causes a big hit ends). It is possible to omit the above, simplify the program debugging, etc., and realize accurate processing using a storage unit with a small capacity. In the unit game number storage unit, the remaining unit game number based on the unit game being executed, and the remaining unit based on the remaining number when the unit game being executed and the number of times when the right is reserved are consumed Even if the number of games and the number of games are separately stored, the target number of times can be derived.

In the processing from S1901, the target count stored in the target count storage unit is used to confirm the content of the unit game in which the right has occurred, and the hold information corresponding to the content is set. First, in the processing of S1901, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter obtained by the occurrence of the start winning is a winning value (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot winning value) that wins the jackpot (S1901), and the jackpot winning is won. If it is a value (S1901: Y), the jackpot storage present flag is turned on to store the jackpot occurrence information in the jackpot information storage unit (S1902), and a hold command to which jackpot winning information is added is set (S1903). ), the pending information output setting process S1707 ends.

Here, the hold command includes information corresponding to the updated number of times of holding, and information that can determine which of the first special symbol, the second special symbol or the normal symbol is held as the type of symbol. Further, as information necessary for execution of the preceding effect, information corresponding to presence/absence of a big hit or presence/absence of reach is added and output to the sub control board 940. When the sub-control board 940 receives the hold command, the sub-control board 940 executes the preceding effect by the display mode and the output of the sound according to the content thereof, and suggests to the player that the jackpot is won or the reach is generated. It should be noted that when a right to a unit game in which a bonus is given to a player such as a big hit or a reach is generated, it is not always necessary to suggest the occurrence of the right to the player with a probability of 100%. It may be configured to execute the pre-stage effect at a specified rate and generate a big hit even if the pre-stage effect is not executed.In addition, it is a unit game that does not win the big hit or a unit game that does not reach. In the unit game in which the grant is not established, the preceding effect is executed in the same manner as the preceding effect, and even if the preceding effect is executed, the award of the privilege is not fixed, and the award is expected. Also good.

In the processing of S1901, when it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter acquired by the occurrence of the start winning is not the jackpot winning value (S1901:N), the unit game is a game which is not won to the jackpot, and in that game. It is determined whether or not a loss reach, in which the reach effect is definitely stopped with a lost design, occurs (S1904). The occurrence determination of this loss-reach is performed by the target number stored in the target number storage unit, a value (pattern number) for identifying the transition pattern of the internal game state, and the transition pattern of the state corresponding to the pattern number (predetermined in the ROM). The area) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not reach is generated by the variable display in the unit game of the target number of times.

In the process of S1904, when it is determined that a loss reach will occur (S1904: Y), a hold command to which the loss reach occurrence information corresponding to the reach occurrence is added is set (S1905). On the other hand, in the process of S1904, when it is determined that the loss reach does not occur (S1904: N), the normal hold command is set (S1906).

After the processing of S1905 or S1906 is executed, it is determined whether the game state in the unit game one time before the target number of times is the state C (probability variation state C) (S1907), and it is determined that the state is the probability variation state C. (S1907: Y), the advantageous game start information is added to the hold command (S1908), and the hold information output setting process S1707 ends. In the pachinko machine 100, the probability variation state D, which is started after the probability variation state C, is set to a gaming state in which it is easier to give a bonus by a small win that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the advantageous gaming state. The start of the game is suggested to the player by the preceding effect through the sub control board 940. Details of the contents of the gaming state relating to the small hit will be described later.

In the process of S1907, when it is determined that the game state one time before the target number of times is not the probability variation state C (S1907), it is determined whether the game state of the target number of times is the state D (probability variation state D) (S1909). If the probability change state D (S1909: Y), the advantageous game execution information is added to the hold command (S1910), and the hold information output setting process S1707 ends. In the unit game in the probability variation state D, the bonus due to the small hit is easily given to the player, and the giving of the bonus is suggested to the player by the preceding effect through the sub control board 940.

In the processing of S1909, when it is determined that the game state of the target number of times is not the state D (S1909: N), it is determined whether the game state of the unit game executed 9 times after the target number of times is the probability variation state C (( S1911), if the probability change state C (S1911: Y), the advantageous game approach information is added to the hold command (S1912), and the hold information output setting process S1707 ends. In a situation where the game state executed after a certain number of times (after nine times in the present embodiment) with respect to the target number of times is the probability changing state C, an advantageous game state in which the bonus due to the small hit is easily given to the player. Since the game can be started with the remaining 10 times, the player is informed by the preceding effect through the sub-control board 940 that the award of the privilege due to the advantageous game state is approaching.

In the processing of S1911, when it is determined that the game state of the unit game executed 9 times after the target number of times is not the state C (S1911: N), the information for generating the preceding effect for the hold command is provided. The pending information output setting process S1707 ends without adding.

Next, the small hit will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, a small hit is set in addition to the above big hit as the lottery result of the unit game related to the second special symbol. When the small hit is won, a different privilege from that when the big hit is won is given to the player. It should be noted that, as one of the types of special game states that occur when a big win is won, a special game state in which a privilege of the same size as that of a small win is awarded may be set.

In the pachinko machine 100, a game ball that has entered the right starting prize winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right starting prize winning switch 442, and is entered downward when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. The regulation solenoid 463 operates. If the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol obtained based on the starting winning is a value that wins a predetermined small hit (hereinafter, a small hit winning value), the small hit is won. .. The small hit prize value is set to a value different from the big hit prize value, and it is set so that the big hit and the small hit are not simultaneously established in one starting winning. In the unit game that is won for the small hit, among the symbols different from the big hit symbol (missing symbol displayed when the big hit is not won), a predetermined small hit symbol is a special symbol display device 471, 472. Is set as a stop pattern.

When the small hit is won, the lower entry restricting solenoid 463 is activated and the lower big winning device 433 is in the entry allowable posture. The admission allowable posture is, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are detected by the special winning switch 443 in one small win, or a predetermined maximum admission time (for example, 3 seconds). When the above has passed, the process ends, and then the vehicle returns to the entry prohibited posture. During the period when this approach-allowed posture continues, the small hitting game state starts when the stop symbol corresponding to the small hitting game state (small hitting game state) is displayed and the small hitting prize is displayed. Then, the small win game state is completed after the lower-large prize winning device 433 returns to the entry prohibited posture. The small hitting game state, like the special game state corresponding to the big hit, is waiting for execution of the variable display, and after the small hitting game state, the variable display relating to the next unit game is performed.

The control of the small hitting game state is performed in the special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 18), and it is determined whether or not the small hit is won in the special symbol finalization display process S1305. When the small win is won, each process of the large winning device operation start process S1306 to the large winning device operation stop process S1311 is performed and the lower large winning device 433 is in the prohibition posture for a period corresponding to the above time. Becomes It is not always necessary to wait for the variable display during the small hitting game state, and the variable display of the next unit game may be started during the small hitting game state.

The small hit is different from the big hit in that it does not trigger a change in the gaming state. When the small hit is won, the game progresses according to the game state defined in the previous lottery. For example, in the normal game state, the normal game state continues after the small hit game state, and in the probability variation game state, one unit game is executed by the end of the small hit game state, and the remaining unit game The number is reduced by one.

Here, details of the contents of the game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the progress of the game state in the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram comparing the specifications of the game in each game state. In FIG. 28, the time saving game state is omitted.

When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on and the game is started, as shown in FIG. 28, first, the normal game state is started. In the normal gaming state, a right to a unit game is generated by a start winning and a game is executed with the expectation of a big hit. When the right of the unit game is generated by the starting winning, the variable display of the special symbol (specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the fixed stop are performed, and the jackpot lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol is won. Then, the game state shifts to the special game state. Whether or not to win the jackpot lottery is determined by a winning determination process S1403 (see FIG. 19) that constitutes a special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 12) that controls the unit game related to the special symbol.

In the special game state, for example, the operation of the special winning device (specifically, the lower special winning device 433 and the upper special winning device 434) is performed a predetermined number of times (specifically, 6 or 16 times) for about 30 seconds. If it is executed and the transition condition (V winning) to the probability variation game state is satisfied during the special game state, then it transits to the probability variation game state, and if the transition condition is not satisfied, the normal game state is passed via the time saving game state. Transition to. Whether or not the V prize is generated is executed as a part of the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 12), and the V prize is generated and the probability variation game state is started (predetermined specification (Equivalent to the game start condition) is established, information corresponding to the probability variation gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage unit (a predetermined area of RAM) that stores the gaming state, and the special symbol is related according to the information. Lottery conditions are set, and the number of remaining unit games corresponding to the number of executions of the probability variation game state is set. Further, the conditions of the normal symbol lottery in the normal symbol related processing S1218 (see FIG. 12) and the transition time to the entry allowable posture of the right starting winning device 432 are also controlled corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage unit. ..

In the probability variation game state, a right to a unit game is generated by a start winning prize (mainly, a starting prize relating to the second special symbol), and the game is executed. In this probability variation game state, a big hit and a small hit occur, and a small hit is continuously generated after reaching the number of remaining unit games predetermined according to the transition pattern. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state ends and shifts to the special gaming state, and again, the probability variation according to the transition pattern according to the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter acquired at the time of jackpot winning. The game state is started. In the probability variation game state, one start winning occurs, the remaining unit game number is decremented by 1 each time it is fixedly stopped after the special symbol is variably displayed, and the big hit until the remaining unit game number becomes "0". If not won, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

Next, specific specifications of the game in each game state will be described. The fluctuation time that can be selected in the pachinko machine 100 is divided into four, and from short time to time, "short time" is 1 second to 5 seconds, "normal time" is 15 seconds to 30 seconds, and "long time 1" is 60. Selection frequency of the variable time selected from 90 seconds to 90 seconds, when "long time 2" is classified from 120 seconds to 180 seconds and when the big hit is not won (big hit non-win) corresponding to each gaming state Have different settings. In FIG. 29, the selection frequency of the jackpot non-winning variation time in each gaming state is shown in order from highest frequency to “⊚”, “∘”, “Δ”, and “−”.

In the normal game state, the normal time is most easily selected, and as the variable display of the normal time, the variable display of the loss without the reach display in the unit game is executed. Next, it is easy to select the long time 1 which is the second longest time after the normal time, and the variable display of the miss reach is mainly executed. The fluctuation display of long time 2 longer than 1 long time is set to have the lowest occurrence frequency, and when the fluctuation display of long time 2 is set, the percentage of big hits is high, and the fluctuation display with high expectation of big hit is executed. To be done. The short-term fluctuation is set not to be selected or less likely to be selected than the long-time fluctuation 2.

Probability variation game state, the variation time selected by five probability variation states A to E are different, and in the probability variation state A and the probability variation state D, the variation display for a short time occupies most, and other variation time is a big hit prize. Except in the case of, the setting is such that it is not executed or hardly executed (for example, less than 1%). In the probability variation states B and E, it is easy to select the variable display for a long time 1 which is longer than in the probability variation states A and D. In the probability variation state B, it is easy to execute the effect of losing reach with the appearance of a specific character. In the probability variation state E, a finish effect accompanied by a display and a sound for notifying the player of the completion of the probability variation state is executed. In the probability variation state C, the short-time variable display and the long-time 1 variable display are executed at substantially the same ratio.

Regarding the jackpot probability, the normal gaming state has a low probability, and the probability variation gaming state is set to have a higher probability than the normal gaming state. As a jackpot benefit, in the normal gaming state, a long-time opening in which a game ball can enter the winning opening of the lower big prize device 433 or the upper big prize device 434 over a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds or 16 rounds) The entry allowable posture corresponding to the state continues, and in the probability variation game state, it is set to be more advantageous than the normal game state, and the open state for a long time for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is set to continue. ..

The small hit probability changes corresponding to the gaming state, and is set to a low probability in the normal gaming state and the probability changing states A to C (for example, 288.5/1, which is the same as the big winning probability in the normal gaming state). Has been done. On the other hand, in the probability variation state D, the probability is set to be higher than that in the normal game state, and for example, when the player is out of the big hit lottery, the small hit is always won. The number of jackpot winning values among the values of the winning random number counter is set to a number (eg, “20”) in which the probability variation state is larger than the number in the normal gaming state (eg, “2”). In the probability changing states D and E, all the values of the winning random number counter except the big hit winning value are set as the winning values of the small hits. In the probability changing states D and E, the small hits are established with a much higher probability than the big hits, and since the games corresponding to the probability changing states D and E are continuous, the small hits are likely to occur continuously.

The small hit bonus is set to a certain privilege in both the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. As this small hit bonus, an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening of the lower big winning device 433 occurs for a predetermined opening time (for example, 3 seconds).

Next, the playability by the small hit in the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG. 30 is a diagram exemplifying the relationship between the progress of time in the probability variation game state and the number of balls that the player can obtain by paying out the game balls (hereinafter referred to as the number of acquired balls). Here, the number of spheres to be acquired is the number of spheres subtracted by subtracting the number of spheres shot in the game area from the number of spheres paid out by winning.

In the pachinko machine 100, if a big hit is won in the normal gaming state, one transition pattern is determined from a plurality of types of transition patterns having different timings of switching the internal state in the probability variation gaming state, and the game proceeds in accordance with the transition pattern. FIG. 30(A) shows a case in which a jackpot is won and a transition is made to the probability variation gaming state, in which a pattern 65 is selected as a transition pattern, and a transition is made to the normal gaming state without winning the jackpot in the probability variation gaming state. It is illustrated.

The pattern 65 is a pattern in which the number of fixed reach occurrence remaining unit games is 68, and the number of lottery reach occurrence remaining unit games is 32 (see FIG. 13). That is, if the jackpot is not won in the probability variation game state, the unit game in the probability variation state A is executed 31 times from 1 to 31 times (remaining unit game number=100 to 69), and the 32nd time (remaining unit game number). =68), the unit game in the probability variation state B is executed once in the unit game, and a loss reach occurs in the unit game.

Then, returning to the probability variation state A, the unit game is executed 35 times in total from the 33rd time to the 67th time (remaining unit game number=67 to 33), and the probability variation state C in the 68th (remaining unit game number=32) unit game. The unit game in is executed once. In the unit game in the probability variation state C, the variation display accompanied by the loss reach or the short-time variation display similar to the probability variation state A is executed with a probability of ½.

After that, the unit game in the probability changing state D is executed 31 times from the 69th game to the 99th game (the number of remaining unit games=31 to 1). In the unit game of the probability variation state D, if the big hit is not won, the small win is won, and the variable display for about 3 seconds is executed based on the start winning associated with the second special symbol. After that, the second special symbol corresponding to the small hit prize is definitely stopped, and an advantageous game state occurs due to the entry allowable attitude of the lower large prize winning device 433 for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds). As a result, a predetermined number of preset prizes (for example, 5 on average) are generated in one unit game, and the predetermined number is multiplied by the number of prize balls for one prize (for example, 13). The number of game balls (for example, 5×13=65) is given to the player as a privilege by paying out for one small hit. As the number of balls to be acquired, the number of balls for 10 balls that are fired in about 6 seconds, which is the sum of the variable display time and the advantageous game time, is subtracted from the payout for the small hit (for example, 55 balls). Is set to.

Here, the number of winnings in one unit game is not necessarily a fixed number, and a predetermined number (5) of game balls that allow winnings after the lower-large prize winning device 433 is in the entry allowable posture. There are cases where extra game balls are won by the time of detecting the winning of the game and shifting to the entry prohibited posture, or there are cases where the gaming ball shifts to the entry prohibited posture without reaching the predetermined number, but it varies. In the present description, the number of winnings will be simplified and described as a fixed number, and the same applies below. It should be noted that the number of balls acquired in one unit game in which a small hit occurs and the number of balls acquired in the special game state depend on the structure of the lower prize winning device 433 of the pachinko machine 100, the shape of the route along which the game balls flow, and the like. It is possible to adjust, by measuring the number of acquired balls and adjusting the shape of the structure part and the position of the switch, the duration of the admissible posture, the number of prizes per small hit so that it matches the design value. Can be fine-tuned.

In the unit game of the probability variation state E, the variable display of the special symbol longer than the probability variation state D (for example, the variation display of about 60 seconds) is executed based on the start winning associated with the second special symbol. After that, the second special symbol corresponding to the small hit win is definitely stopped, and like the probability change state D, an advantageous game state occurs due to the entry allowable posture of the lower large prize winning device 433 for a fixed time (for example, 3 seconds). , It is possible to acquire more game balls than the unit game in the probability variation state D. That is, the privilege by the gaming state of the small hit prize for the number of times of unit games of the probability variation state D and the probability variation state E is given to the player after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the probability variation game state.

In one probability variation gaming state, the bonus for the small hit corresponds to the number of unit games in the probability variation states D and E. When the transition pattern is pattern 65, the bonus is obtained as the bonus for one small hit. The game balls of a number obtained by multiplying the number of balls by the unit game number of 31 times (for example, 55 balls×31 times=approximately 1700) are awarded to the player as a privilege. This number of game balls is more than the number of balls to be acquired in the special game state of 16 rounds which is controlled after the big hit, and the player is not only the occurrence of the special game state but also the probability change state in the probability change game state thereafter. Playing in anticipation of the start of D.

After the unit game in the probability variation state E has been executed, the game state shifts from the probability variation game state to the normal game state, and the number of acquired balls once acquired by continuing the game is gradually consumed.

As shown in FIG. 30A, in the special game state, the probability variation states D and E, the number of acquisition balls gradually increases and the probability variation changes from the jackpot winning through the special game state and the probability variation game state. It gradually decreases in states A to C. First, the number of balls acquired increases depending on the special game state after the big hit.

In the special game state, the number of balls is obtained according to the continuous round determined based on the value obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter as the type of the special game state. In the special game state, the number of winning game balls (8) as a condition for shifting from the entry permitted posture to the entry prohibited posture in one round is multiplied by the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game balls (13). The number (104) of game balls is basically paid out after one round. However, the number of balls won is not constant because there is a round in which a lot of game balls are paid out due to the game balls entering the special winning apparatus immediately before shifting to the entry prohibited posture. The number of balls in the special gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 is set to, for example, about 500 in the case of winning in 6 rounds, and about 1500 in the case of winning in 16 rounds, which is more than in the case of 6 rounds.

In the probability variation gaming state, among the probability variation states A to E, in the probability variation states A to C corresponding to a part of the states, the number of acquired balls does not increase compared to the special gaming state and the number near the constant is maintained, In detail, it is set to gradually decrease. By setting the number of balls to be acquired in the probability changing states A to C not to be a fixed amount but gradually decreasing, the situation of the number of balls to be acquired can be changed according to the length of the period of the probability changing states A to C. It is possible to make the number of balls significantly different according to the pattern selected as the transition pattern, and to provide the player with various game characteristics due to the change in the transition pattern. As the probability changing states A to C, the number of shot balls and the number of prize balls may match, and as a result, the number of acquired balls does not decrease and may be set to maintain a state close to a constant value, or substantially the same as the normal game state. The number of game balls may be reduced at a rate of.

In the probability variation gaming state, in probability variation states A to E, in probability variation states D and E corresponding to a part of the probability variation states, the number of acquired balls increases as compared to the probability variation states A to C. This increase in the number of balls won is due to the advantageous gaming state that is generated based on the winning of the small hit, which occurs multiple times in succession. It is possible to enjoy the privilege by the advantageous game state in which the game ball can be continuously acquired for a certain period by the unit game of. For example, when the pattern 65 is selected as the transition pattern, approximately 1,700 pieces, in pattern 7 in which the probability variation state D continues for the longest in the transition pattern, the unit games of the probability variation states D and E continue 67 times. The number of balls acquired is about 3700. On the other hand, in the pattern 105 in which the probability variation state D is the shortest in the transition patterns, the unit games in the probability variation states D and E continue 12 times, and the number of acquired balls becomes about 650. In this way, even if the big hit is not won in the probability variation game state, after a certain unit game is executed, the bonus is given to the player by the small win.

Next, a case where a big hit is won in the probability variation game state will be described. FIG. 30(B) is a case where the jackpot is won and a transition is made to the probability variation gaming state. After the pattern 7 is selected as the transition pattern and the special gaming state is executed, the probability variation gaming state is started, and the probability variation gaming state. It illustrates a case where a special jackpot game is won and a probability variation gaming state with the pattern 105 as a transition pattern is executed. Pattern 7 is a transition pattern in which the probability variation state D is set to be long, and as shown by the line with the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 30(B), if the jackpot is not won during the probability variation game state, depending on the special game state. It is possible to expect more prize balls to be obtained from the middle of the probability variation game state to the end, for example, an expected number of balls of about 4,500.

However, if the second big jackpot is won in the middle of the probability variation game state and the probability variation game state of another transition pattern is started and the transition pattern in which the number of probability variation state D is short is selected, the special game state is generated. Even if the number of game balls increases, the number of game balls during the probability change game state is less than that in the transition pattern (pattern 7) before the big hit occurs, and the number of balls finally obtained as a ball is reduced even if the big hit occurs. Cases can arise. Therefore, while expecting a big hit, the player is worried about playing a game when the number of balls to be won due to the small hit, which may be initially obtained due to the occurrence of the big hit, decreases. .. On the contrary to this case, when a transition pattern with a long number of times is selected after a transition pattern with a short number of probability variation states D is selected, a large amount of game balls are acquired, and the transition pattern It is possible to add a variety of game features in which the benefits given to the player vary depending on the selection order.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 based on the preceding effect will be described. In the pachinko machine 100, the earlier the probability variation state D starts, the more the number of balls acquired until the probability variation game state ends. Therefore, the player plays the game in the probability variation gaming state in anticipation of early start of the probability variation state D in addition to the jackpot winning. In the probability variation gaming state, the preceding effect is executed, and the player is informed of the jackpot winning or the start time of the probability variation state D.

The preceding effect for the big hit is set in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), and the hold command with the big hit information is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 when the start winning is generated. , The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled corresponding to the hold command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are retained is displayed by the number of horizontally displayed circular symbols, and a large circle is displayed as the second special symbol retained display. If, in case of holding display of the unit game which has not been won to the big hit based on the normal starting prize, a blue circle is additionally displayed, and if the held display of the unit game which has been won to the big hit is not won The display is suspended in a mode different from that described above (for example, a circle that changes to a rainbow color is additionally displayed). The player can visually recognize not only the number of times of holding the unit game increased but also that the unit game to be won for the big hit has been held by visually recognizing the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479. Further, when the sub-control board 940 receives the hold command to which the jackpot winning information is added, the hold command to which the below-mentioned lose-reach occurrence information is added is sub-controlled with a certain probability (for example, 1/10 probability). The display contents of the decorative pattern display device 479 are controlled in the same manner as when the board 940 receives the settings, and after the reach effect is set, it is a big hit and a special game state may occur.

A plurality of types of preceding effects are set as the preceding effects for the start timing of the probability variation state D. One is an undetermined preceding effect (hereinafter referred to as a pre-confirmation preceding effect) in a situation where the start time of the probability changing state D has been selected, but its execution is not yet confirmed. It is the preceding effect after the execution is confirmed after the start of the state D is confirmed (hereinafter, referred to as the confirmed after-effect). In the following, the content displayed as the pre-fixed preceding effect is referred to as the pre-fixed preceding effect display, and the content displayed as the post-determined preceding effect is referred to as the post-determined preceding effect display.

The pre-determination preceding effect can be executed when the right of the unit game 9 times before the probability variation state C is established by the start winning. Specifically, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), a hold command to which the advantageous game approach information is added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 when the start winning occurs, and the hold The display content of the decorative pattern display device 479 is controlled according to the command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the remaining unit game number display corresponding to the remaining unit game number displayed by the number “55” in the central portion of the display area is normally lit and displayed with a constant brightness, When the control board 940 receives the hold command to which the advantageous game approach information is added, in addition to additionally displaying the circle mark for the hold increase of the unit game, the remaining unit game number display blinks as the pre-confirmation preceding effect display. And, this blinking display is continued until the probability variation game state ends or the big hit is won. The player recognizes that not only the number of times of holding the unit game is increased but also the probability variation state D following the probability variation state C can be started in the unit game after about 10 times, which is advantageous in that the small hits are continuously won. A gaming state can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the amusement property of visually recognizing the change in the mode of the remaining unit game number in the expectation that the blinking display of the remaining unit game number display is started at an early stage as much as possible.

When the big hit is won by the start winning that is established after the blinking display of the remaining unit game number display is started, the probability variation game state ends and the special game state is entered. Therefore, even if the blinking display of the number of remaining unit games is started, the unit game in the probability variation state D is not necessarily executed. In this manner, the blinking display of the number of remaining unit games is the pre-determination leading effect for the probability changing state D.

Further, the other pre-determination preceding effect can be executed when the unit game right in the probability variation state C is established by the start winning. When the right of the unit game in the probability variation state C is established, the pre-confirmation preceding effect by the hold display and the pre-confirmation preceding effect by the effect execution of the loser reach are executed. In the pre-confirmation preceding effect by the hold display, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), the hold command to which the advantageous game start information is added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 when the start winning occurs. Then, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled corresponding to the hold command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, a hold display corresponding to the hold increase of the unit game, which is displayed in a circle in the lower part of the display area, is additionally displayed in a blue circle during normal operation, and the sub-control board 940 is advantageous. When the hold command to which the game execution information is added is received, as a pre-confirmation leading effect display, a circle for the increase in the hold of the unit game is additionally displayed in green. That is, a mode (blue circle) corresponding to the addition of the unit game right to the above probability variation states A and B and a mode (rainbow colored circle) corresponding to the addition of the unit game right to the jackpot winning. Performs a hold display corresponding to the addition of the unit game right by another mode (green circle). The reservation display of the unit game in green is shifted to the left every time the unit game being executed is completed, and is continuously displayed until the unit game in the probability variation state C is started.

In addition, when the big hit lottery is not won in the probability changing state C, the reach effect accompanied by the second reach display is executed with a probability of ½. The player can start the probability variation state D from the next unit game, with the display that the reach effect accompanied by the reach display two times after the probability variation game state is started is definitely stopped with a lost design (predetermination preceding effect display). You can recognize that. That is, it is possible to suggest the occurrence of an advantageous game state by the number of times the reach effect is executed as the mode of variable display, and the control of the generation of the advantageous game state can be realized by using the transition pattern. In addition, the preceding effect can be easily realized only by changing the game state according to the preset variation time. Further, since the variation time of the variable display in which the reach effect is executed is set to be longer than that of the variation display in the probability variation state A in which the reach effect is not executed, it is advantageous that "a chance time occurs" etc. It is possible to execute a variable display to which an effect that suggests a different game state is added, and after performing an effect that clearly distinguishes the switching of the game state, it is possible to shift to an advantageous game state by the probability variation state D.

In addition, when the big hit lottery is not won in the probability changing state C, the short-time fluctuation display is selected with a probability of ½. It is expected that the player can start the probability variation state D from the next unit game even if the reach effect accompanied by the reach display twice is not definitely stopped after the probability variation game state is started. You can That is, even when the number of times of execution of the reach effect as the mode of variable display does not reach the predetermined number of times, an advantageous game state can be generated by utilizing the transition pattern. Further, as the variation time of the variation display in which the reach effect is not executed, the variation time equivalent to (or the same as) the variation display of the probability variation state A is set, and the suddenly advantageous gaming state starts after the monotonous situation continues. The player can enjoy the situation. As a result, it is possible to provide the game playability of shifting to the advantageous game state by the probability variation state D in various modes different from the effect that clearly distinguishes the switching of the game state.

If a loss reach occurs during the probability variation game state, a hold command to which the loss reach occurrence information is added is set. Specifically, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), a hold command to which the lose reach occurrence information is added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 when the start winning is generated, and the hold command is held. The display content of the decorative pattern display device 479 is controlled according to the command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, when a normal hold command is received, the hold display corresponding to the increase in the hold of the unit game, which is displayed in the lower part of the display area with a circle, is lit with a blue circle. When the sub-control board 940 receives a hold command to which the loose-reach occurrence information is added, the blue circle mark for the increase in the hold of the unit game is displayed in a blinking manner. The hold display of the unit game by this blinking display is shifted to the left every time the unit game being executed is completed, and is continuously displayed until the unit game is started.

Since it is possible to shift to an advantageous game state by the occurrence of two loss reach, the player can recognize the occurrence of loss reach by the blinking display of the hold display and expect the transition to the advantageous game state. Since it is possible, the blinking display of the blue circle for the increase in hold corresponds to the pre-determination preceding effect display. In addition, even when the sub-control board 940 receives a hold command to which the jackpot winning information is added, the display content of the decorative pattern display device 479 is controlled in the same manner as when the hold command to which the lose-reach occurrence information is added is received. Therefore, by visually recognizing the blinking display of the blue circle, the player can be expected to generate a special game state based on the big hit.

The post-confirmation leading effect can be executed when a start winning for the execution of the probability changing state D occurs. Specifically, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), a hold command to which advantageous game execution information is added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 when the start winning is generated, and the hold command is held. The display content of the decorative pattern display device 479 is controlled according to the command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, a hold display corresponding to the hold increase of the unit game, which is displayed in a circle in the lower part of the display area, is additionally displayed in a blue circle during normal operation, and the sub-control board 940 is advantageous. When the hold command added with the game execution information is received, the hold display is additionally displayed in red. The unit game hold display in red corresponds to the preceding effect display after being confirmed, and is displayed by shifting to the left every time the unit game being executed is completed, and continuously displayed until the unit game is started. It The probability variation state D continues for a plurality of times until the number of remaining unit games becomes one, and the continuous display of the unit game hold display in red indicating the start of execution of the probability variation state D is continuously displayed for the number of consecutive times. The player recognizes that not only the unit game hold has been increased, but also the game in the probability variation state D is repeatedly executed a plurality of times, and the start of the advantageous game state in which the small hits are consecutive is confirmed. be able to. For this reason, expecting that the blinking display of the number of remaining unit games will be started at the earliest possible stage, visually confirm the change in the mode of the number of remaining unit games, and after confirming the blinking display, expect the predecessor effect display after confirmation. You can enjoy the game play.

According to the pachinko machine 100 described above, in the winning determination process S1403, the value of the jackpot symbol random value acquired by the start winning is determined, and the transition of the probability variation gaming state after the special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol random value. The pattern is set. The transition patterns include 120 types of transition patterns (patterns 1 to 120, which differ in the timings of the probability variation states B and C among the probability variation states A to E, and have different lengths of the probability variation state D performed after the probability variation state C). (See FIG. 13) is set. In the probability variation game state, the probability variation state in which the small hit prize is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state due to the combination of the plurality of unit games executed based on the start winning of the second special symbol a plurality of times. The probability variation game state including D and E is generated by the control of the main control board 920.

In the probability variation gaming state, the start timing of the probability variation state D is determined by the lottery reach occurrence remaining unit game number determined corresponding to the transition pattern, and the probability variation that consecutive small hits occur as the content of the privilege given to the player The number of unit games in the state D is different, and the time when the probability variation state D is started after the probability variation game state is started as the privilege giving time is also different.

In the winning determination process S1403, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number value corresponding to the probability variation gaming state by each transition pattern is acquired, and the stopped symbol identification value is set by the subsequent stopped symbol generation process S1404. Then, the stop symbol based on the stop symbol identification value is displayed before the start of the special game state by any of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, and stopped. The probability variation game state occurs due to the transition pattern according to the pattern number corresponding to the symbol identification value.

In this way, the probability variation game state transition pattern is determined by setting the transition pattern before the start of the probability variation game state, so that there are multiple types of continuous games configured by unit games based on multiple start winnings as the probability variation game state. It can be implemented in different ways depending on the transition pattern. Further, since the start timing of the probability variation state D is determined by the transition pattern, it is possible to easily control the preceding effect corresponding to the start timing of the probability variation state D based on the remaining unit game number that is predetermined according to the transition pattern. Therefore, the information regarding the probability change state D can be suitably transmitted to the player.

Further, before the probability variation game state is started, the information corresponding to the specific game state to be executed is either the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol or the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol. Since it is displayed, the contents that can be executed as the probability variation game state are displayed by the display device mounted in the pachinko machine 100 in advance. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 100 is improperly modified, it becomes necessary to make a mistake including the consistency between the display content and the start time of the probability variation state D, making it difficult to adjust the period of the probability variation state D, and the crime. It is possible to effectively suppress fraudulent acts in which a person tries to obtain an unfair advantage. In particular, the display content displayed by the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is determined by the control that combines the calculation and the replacement as described above, and a large number of stop symbol identification values can be set, so that the stop symbol. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally reproduce the method of generating the display content as the identification value.

In addition, since the contents and timing of the privilege can be set in advance before the specific game state is started and the information corresponding to the contents can be shown to the player in advance, it is possible to simply win the unit game once. A gaming machine that can combine a new game property in which a privilege is provided over a plurality of unit games as compared with a game property in which a privilege is provided, and an effect that expects the grant of the privilege at an early stage. Can be provided. In addition, by applying a plurality of control patterns to each unit game, it is possible to control the probability variation game state configured by a plurality of unit games, so that a small hit as a privilege granted by executing the probability variation game state. It is possible to easily control the size corresponding to the number of times of winning and the number of times of reach production execution.

Further, compared with the normal game state, the probability variation state D in which the unit game in which the privilege is more likely to be given to the player is continuous a plurality of times than in the regular game state is a probability variation state A in which the unit game in which the privilege is less likely to be provided is continuous multiple times than the probability variation state A. It is executed after execution of ~C. For this reason, it is possible to provide the player with not only the lottery for each unit game in the probability variation game state, but also the game play that expects an early start of the probability variation state D to be started later.

In addition, before the probability variation state D is started and before the start winning of the unit game in which the probability variation state D is started is established, a hold display in green or a blinking display of the number of remaining unit games as the pre-confirmation leading effect display. The player is informed of the start time of the probability variation state D. Therefore, the sense of expectation for the start of the probability variation state D can be increased from an early stage before the start winning corresponding to the unit game of the probability variation state D.

Further, before the probability variation state D is started, and after the start winning of the unit game in which the probability variation state D is started is established, as a post-confirmation preceding effect display set in a mode different from the pre-confirmation preceding effect display The player is suggested to start the probability change state D by the red hold display. Therefore, as a period in which it is possible to definitely expect the start of the probability variation state D, the confirmation display in red is visually recognized after the retention display in green is visually confirmed, and the probability variation state D is finally started. It is possible to execute an effect that gradually increases the sense of expectation for giving.

Further, after the start winning of the unit game in which the probability variation state D is started is established, the after-confirmation preceding effect display is displayed in a mode different from the before-confirmation preceding effect display. Therefore, after the confirmation, the preceding effect display is displayed at an early stage, and it is possible to avoid the situation where the award is invalidated due to the progress of the game thereafter, or it is difficult to generate the starting prize. The privilege grant timing information corresponding to the privilege grant timing can be displayed at a suitable timing that does not cause the inconvenience of forcing the player to spend a considerable amount of time and consume the game ball before granting the privilege.

In addition, it is possible to identify to the player that the pre-confirmation preceding effect display is an effect in which the game state may be changed thereafter and is different from the post-confirmation preceding effect display, by the difference in the mode. .. Therefore, after the start time of the probability change state D is suggested by the pre-determination preceding effect display, the game state may be changed by the subsequent big hit due to the start winning, and the starting winning is difficult to set. By informing the player in advance that there is a possibility of compelling the player to consume a certain amount or more of the game ball before the probability variation state D is started, It is possible to reduce the possibility that a person may feel dissatisfied.

In addition, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), the winning random number corresponding to the big hit winning is selected between the unit game being executed and the unit game that has already been started and has not been executed using the big hit storage present flag. To check whether there is a unit game in which the value of the counter is stored, and if there is a unit game corresponding to the big hit, set a normal hold command (processing in S1802 of FIG. 27) and execute the preceding effect. It is set not to execute each process of (specifically, each process of adding loss-reach occurrence information, advantageous game start information, advantageous game start information, advantageous game execution information, and advantageous game approach information to the hold command). ing. Therefore, with respect to the start winning that is established after the change of the game state is confirmed by the transition of the game state due to the jackpot winning, the situation in which the game state changes after the execution of the pre-decision leading effect is suppressed, and the jackpot winning is performed. The predecessor effect can be executed only after the decision is made, only in a situation where the game state is not changed.

In addition, when the big hit is generated during the probability variation game state, the probability variation game state shifts to the special game state before the predetermined 100 unit games are executed. Therefore, the transition pattern is understood by visually recognizing the stop symbol identification values displayed on the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, and, for example, even if the player recognizes the occurrence of the probability variation state D for a long time, the subsequent It is possible to diversify the progress of the game, such as a situation in which the probability variation state D is not executed depending on the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the contents of the probability variation game state are uniquely selected before the start of the game, and then the probability variation state D feels monotonous like the work of obtaining the number of balls acquired by executing the probability variation state D. You can In addition, as the expected value of the number of balls to be obtained including the probability variation game state by the jackpot winning, the actual number of balls to be won when the jackpot is subsequently won, while making it a large number corresponding to the case where all of the probability variation state D are executed. The number can be less than the expected value of the sum of all the probable variation states D. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the acquired number of balls expected by the player to a large value, and it is possible to make a suitable setting that suppresses excessive gambling. Moreover, since the special jackpot winning transitions to the special gaming state, even if at least some of the benefits expected during the probability varying gaming state are not given to the player, a new special gaming state and the probability variation game that can be transitioned to after that It is possible to give the player a sense of gain by another privilege depending on the state, and reduce the sense of loss that the player feels.

In the probability variation state D, the variation time is set to the shortest time as compared with the other game states, and the unit game with a high probability of winning the small hit is continuously executed. For this reason, a unit game having a long proportion of the possible entry period in which the prize can be won in the lower-large prize winning apparatus 433 is continuously generated a plurality of times, and the bonus is efficiently provided to the player at the timing of the probability variation state D during the probability variation gaming state. Can be granted.

It is possible to control the variation time in the probability variation game state by controlling the transition pattern, and as the unit game one time before the start of the probability variation state D, the probability variation state C in which a unit game with a long variation time accompanied by reach production is easily executed is set. There is. For this reason, it is preferable that the reach production is made to correspond to the award time of the privilege by the probability variation state D so that the player can easily pay attention to the unit game expecting the award time of the award and the time when the award of the privilege is suggested. Can be performed.

In the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), when the start prize is generated while the execution of the unit game is suspended, the target number of times corresponding to the execution time of the unit game in which the start prize is generated, It is derived based on the number of remaining unit games of the unit game being executed. Therefore, compared with the case where the target number of unit games in which the start winning occurs and the remaining unit number of games are managed separately, the storage area of the RAM used as the unit game number storage unit is reduced, and both times It is possible to reduce the possibility that the synchronization of the update will be lost.

In the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), based on the once derived target number, another number of game states such as one time before and nine times after the target number are also determined. Therefore, the process of deriving the number of times required to determine the execution of each effect can be summarized, and the processing load required to execute various effects can be reduced.

<Control of entry of game ball into specific passage TA>
Next, control of whether to enter the game ball into the specific passage TA when the big hit is won in the lottery related to the special symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35. First, the structure of the prize winning device unit 600 including the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 for controlling whether or not a game ball can enter the specific passage TA will be described with reference to FIG. 31 and FIG. The operation of the winning device unit 600 in the gaming state will be described.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flow-down path on the right side of the game area. 32 is a structural explanatory view of the winning device unit 600. FIG. 32(A) shows the configuration of the winning device unit 600 from the front side, and FIG. 32(B) shows the ball transfer device 602 in plan view. The state which it did is shown typically. For ease of understanding, in the drawings starting from FIG. 31, the character “V” is attached to the position of the specific passage TA and the character “N” is attached to the position of the non-specific passage TB as necessary. The solid line shows an example of the game ball flowing down the flow path, and the flow path of the game ball is shown by an arrow. 32A shows a state in which the front cover 612 of the winning device unit 600 is removed, and FIG. 32B shows an operation direction of the ball transfer device 602 by an arrow, and a transfer passage KT (connection). The passage KD) is shown by a one-dot chain line, and the position of the lower major winning device 433 is shown by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 31, the winning device unit 600 is arranged on the front side of the game board 400 and on the lower right side of the game area. When a game is played by a right-handed game method in which a game ball flows down from the right side of the central structure 420, the game ball is a downflow path (right downflow path) in the right part of the game area corresponding to the right side of the central structure 420. KR) and flow downward. On the right side of the game board 400, a winning combination operation device 435, a starting device 436, a starting winning device 432, an upper prize winning device 434, and a lower prize winning device 433 are sequentially provided from the upstream side along the right downflow route KR. ing. When the game is played by the right-handed game technique, the flow-down changing member such as the nail 411 provided on the upstream side of each device 432 to 436 or the wall surface of the central structure 420 controls the flow direction of the game ball, and each device 432 is controlled. The game balls are guided to the arrangement positions of the respective devices 432 to 436 at a fixed ratio set with respect to ˜436.

The winning device unit 600 includes a base 611 made of transparent synthetic resin, a lower winning device 433, an upper winning device 434, a ball transfer device 602, and a sorting mechanism 601. The plurality of big winning devices 433 and 434 and the distribution mechanism 601 are attached to the base 611 to be integrated into a state of the prize device unit 600, and then attached to the base 401 of the game board 400. A front cover 612 made of transparent synthetic resin is attached to the front surface of the winning device unit 600 as a part of the base 611, and easily contacts a game ball flowing down inside the winning device unit 600 from the front side of the game board 400. It cannot be configured. In addition, the winning device unit 600 does not necessarily need to be configured by integrating the plurality of big winning devices 433, 434, 601 and the sorting mechanism 601. Some or all of the devices are separate parts, and the game board 400 is provided. The prize winning device unit 600 may be configured by a plurality of devices attached to the base 401 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32(A), the prize winning device unit 600 is provided with a connection passage KD that connects the lower major winning device 433 and the upper major winning device 434 as part of the rightward flow path KR. The connection passage KD is formed by the base 611 of the winning device unit 600, and a transfer passage KT that is inclined upward toward the downstream side (the direction of the arrow indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 32A) is provided in a part of the connection passage KD. .. The transfer passage KT is configured such that the game balls cannot proceed to the downstream side by its own weight, and a ball transfer device 602 for transferring the game balls is provided in the transfer passage KT. The game ball that has reached the transfer passage KT can be transferred by the ball transfer device 602 to the obliquely upper side (upper left oblique side in FIG. 32A) that is inclined upward as the downstream side of the rightward flow path KR.

As shown in FIG. 32(A), the sphere transfer device 602 is attached to the base 611 so as to be positioned on the rear side with respect to the transfer passage KT, and a part thereof is passed through an opening 613 formed in the base 611. It projects into the transport passage KT. As shown in FIG. 32(B), the ball transfer device 602 includes a rubber belt 621, a pulley 622 as a support member that supports the belt 621 at a plurality of positions along the continuous direction of the transfer passage KT, and a belt. 621 is provided with a synthetic resin ball transfer unit 623 that is integrated with the belt 621 so as to be able to project from the transfer passage KT side, and a transfer motor 624 (see FIG. 10) configured by a stepping motor to rotate the belt 621. ing.

The ball transfer unit 623 projects into the transfer path KT so as to be positioned above the bottom surface of the transfer path KT by the radius of the game ball, and the transfer motor 624 operates to move the game ball in the transfer path KT. The balls are transported one by one to the downstream side where the large winning a prize device 433 is provided while being supported diagonally downward by the ball transport unit 623.

The carry motor 624 operates under the control of the main control board 920, and always operates at a constant speed after the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. The operation speed of the conveyance motor 624 is such that the game ball that has flowed down from the installation position of the upper prize winning device 434 passes through the connection passage KD and then the lower prize winning device 433 is installed after a certain time (for example, about 3.0 seconds) has passed. It is set to reach the position. Then, from the installation position of the upper prize winning device 434 to the entrance of the specific passage TA provided inside the lower prize winning device 433, a predetermined time (for example, about 3.6 seconds) is the shortest flowing time (shortest flowing time. ), the game ball flows down.

Further, the operation speed of the carry motor 624 is approximately the same as the game ball firing time interval, or slightly shorter (for example, a short time at a rate of about 70% to about 90%) from the ball carrier 602. The game balls are set to flow down one by one to the downstream side where the lower major winning device 433 is located. Therefore, it is less likely that the game balls will stay on the upstream side of the ball transfer device 602, and the ball transfer device 602 causes the game balls to flow down to the downstream side at regular intervals, and the lower-large prize winning device 433 is provided. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game balls will interfere with each other when the game balls flow down along the inclination in the inside of the game machine, the speed will be extremely decreased, or the game balls may be stopped.

The distribution mechanism 601 sets the game ball that has entered the lower special prize device 433 (that is, the game ball that has won the lower special prize opening 433A) to a non-specific passage TB formed in the inner region of the lower special prize opening 433A, or It is assigned to a specific passage TA. In the distribution mechanism 601, a plate-like shutter provided at the entrance portion of the specific passage TA is operated by driving a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10), and has a guiding posture that allows a game ball to enter the specific passage TA. , It is possible to switch between a non-guided posture in which the game ball enters the non-specific passage TB without allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage TA. If the distribution mechanism 601 is in the non-guided posture, the game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening 433A passes over the shutter that blocks the entrance of the specific passage TA and advances to the non-specific passage TB. If the distribution mechanism 601 is in the guiding posture and the entrance of the specific passage TA is open, the game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening 433A enters the specific passage TA.

Next, the operation control of the prize winning device unit 600 (specifically, the lower prize winning device 433, the upper prize winning device 434, and the distribution mechanism 601) in the special game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining operation control of the winning device unit 600, and FIG. 34 is a timing chart showing main operations of the winning device unit 600. FIG. 35 is a view showing the operation of the winning device unit 600, and illustrates an example of a main state in which the winning device unit 600 shown in FIG. 32(A) operates during the special game state. Note that, in FIG. 35, for ease of understanding, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 that is in the entry allowable posture and the distribution mechanism 601 that is in the guidance posture are shown by a dashed line.

In the special game state, the operations of the lower prize winning device 433, the upper prize winning device 434, and the distribution mechanism 601 are controlled by the main control board 920, and a prize ball is paid out as a game value is added more than in the normal game state. It is in a state where it easily occurs. There are two types of special game states, a special game state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA and a special game state in which the game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA. The game ball enters the specific passage TA. The main control board 920 controls whether or not to do so.

The state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA occurs in a part of a round composed of a plurality of times, and the distribution mechanism 601 operates to open the entrance of the specific passage TA (hereinafter The specific round, which is limited to the sixth round in the present embodiment. Further, in the specific round, whether or not to enter the game ball into the specific passage TA is determined after the round immediately before the specific round (the fifth round in the present embodiment) is finished, and then the specific round ( This is realized by changing the time (interval time) until the start of the sixth round).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the special game state, control is performed so that the game ball can enter the specific passage TA with a different probability depending on the type of the special symbol that is won for the big hit. In the case of winning related to the first special symbol, the game ball can enter the specific passage TA in a part of the long-term (16 rounds) special game state with a large number of continuous rounds (long-term B in FIG. 22), and the rest Specified in a special game state of short-term (6 rounds) with a short number of consecutive rounds (short-term A and short-term B in FIG. 22) and a part of long-term special game state (long-term A in FIG. 22) It is set so that the game ball cannot enter the passage TA. The probability of a special game state in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA is determined by the winning ratio of these special game states, and this probability is set to 50%. In the case of winning related to the second special symbol, the game ball enters the specific passage TA in both the short-term and long-term special game states with different numbers of continuous rounds, and the special game in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA The probability that a condition will occur is set to 100%.

In the special game state, only a part differs depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific passage TA, and most of the common control is performed. In the following, the control of the long-term special game state is exemplified, 16 round jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "16R jackpot (V prize)") in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, and 16 round jackpot (hereinafter, "16R jackpot (V A description will be given of a control example of "winning prize"). Regarding the 6-round big hit with a short number of continuous rounds, the 7th and subsequent rounds are omitted from the 16-round big hit, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When a "16R jackpot (V winning)" occurs, as shown in FIG. 33, the first prize winning device 434 is the same in each round from the first round to the fourth round and from the seventh round to the sixteenth round. It operates according to the open pattern (continuous open) and the end condition. Each round is started by the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 of the upper prize winning device 434 taking an allowable entry position in which the game ball can enter the inside of the large prize winning device 434, and the allowable entry position is changed during each round. Continue (see FIG. 35(A)).

In addition, in each round, a predetermined entry allowable number (eg, 8) of game balls as a condition for ending the round is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444, or the maximum entry allowable time from the start of the round (eg, (29.5 seconds), the upper entry control mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibited posture by the control of the main control board 920 in accordance with the establishment of the ending condition. The special winning device 434 is provided with a winning opening (upper winning opening 434A) formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape on the rear side with respect to the rightward flow path KR, and serves as the upper entry restricting mechanism 454. The upper special winning opening 434A is opened and closed by the plate-shaped lid member that closes the special winning opening 434A, and whether or not the game ball can enter the upper special winning opening 434A is controlled. The interval time from the end of each round to the start of the next round is basically set to a fixed time (for example, 2.0 seconds), and only the time immediately before the specific round is the playing ball to the specific passage TA. Different times are set according to whether or not to enter.

The fifth round in the "16R jackpot (V winning)" is identical in that it is a round in which the upper award winning device 434 takes the entry permission posture, as compared with the previous rounds (first to fourth rounds), The difference is that the conditions for ending the round are different so that the time for the approach-allowed posture becomes longer. Specifically, the allowable entry number in the fifth round is set to a number different from that in the first to fourth rounds (for example, 10), so that the game balls flow down the right-side downflow route KR by the right hitting game technique. If the game ball has been fired, the fifth round will end at a different timing from the first to fourth rounds. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a game ball is launched into the game area by the launching device 330 at regular firing time intervals (approximately 0.6 seconds), and the firing is continued by the right-handed gaming technique. If it is, each round ends in the time (approximately 4.8 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing time interval by the admissible number of entries in the first to fourth rounds, and the fifth round is more than the previous rounds. The round ends when a long time elapses until a number of winnings occur.

Here, the player who wants to suppress the consumption of the game balls as much as possible wins the upper special winning opening 434A by the number (8) of the game balls in each round, which corresponds to the allowable entry number, and between the subsequent rounds. In order to reduce the number of game balls that do not win during the interval time and head toward the discharge port 401A as much as possible, there is a possibility that the game balls will be intermittently shot only at the timing when the prize occurs. When this intermittent game ball is fired just before the sixth round, which corresponds to the specific round, the lower major prize device 433 and the distribution mechanism in the specific round so that the game ball can enter the specific passage TA. Even if the operation control of 601 is performed, the game ball may not enter the specific passage TA, and the player may invalidate the right to obtain the probability variation game state that has been acquired with great care, and there is a possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the ending condition of the fifth round is set to be different from that of the previous round. Therefore, when the player who performs the intermittent firing operation fires the game balls every eight balls as in the fourth round, the fifth round does not end. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the situation from the fifth round to the sixth round is different from the situation before that, and prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the end of the fifth round. It is possible to increase the possibility of continuing the firing of the game ball until the sixth round. For example, it is possible to display that the V winning is invalid unless the game ball is fired until the sixth round on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 by using information such as characters and figures to make it difficult for the player to overlook. You can do it. As a result, in the specific round (sixth round), the possibility of the game ball entering the specific passage TA is accelerated, and the possibility that the player invalidates the right of the probability variation game state is reduced. can do.

The condition for ending the fifth round may be set to end in a shorter time until the fourth round. In this case, since the game ball is additionally fired by the same firing operation as that up to the fourth round, the game ball can be made to flow down toward the specific passage TA after the end of the fifth round. The end condition of the fifth round may be set to be the same as that of the fourth round, and in this case, the end control of the fifth round can be shared with the fourth round, which is preferable.

From the fifth round to the sixth round in the “16R jackpot (V winnings)”, as shown in FIG. 34(A), a long time has passed from the end of the period of the fifth round (“5R” in FIG. 34(A)). After the interval time (long interval), the sixth round (“6R” in FIG. 34(A)) is started. During the fifth round, the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is turned on, and the game ball that has arrived in front of the upper special prize device 434 enters the upper special winning opening 434A (see FIG. 35(A)). For this reason, during the fifth round, the game balls do not flow down to the connection passage KD, and there is a period in which the game balls do not flow down to the lower winning a prize device 433 side where the specific passage TA is provided (flow-down period) (FIG. 34). (See (A)).

In the fifth round, when the entry of the allowable number (10) of game balls into the upper special winning opening 434A is detected by the upper special winning switch 444, the fifth round ends, and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is turned off. (Time t1). When the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is turned off, the game ball that has arrived in front of the upper special prize device 434 does not enter the upper special prize opening 434A, and the game ball flows downward in front of the upper special prize device 434. , The period during which the game ball can flow down to the side of the special winning device 433 where the specific passage TA is provided (flowable period). This flowable period continues until the seventh round is started and the opening of the upper special winning opening 434A is started.

The long interval time from the fifth round to the sixth round is that the game ball that has flowed down in front of the upper prize winning device 434 after the end of the fifth round has the guiding mechanism of the distribution mechanism 601 after the start of the sixth round. Is set to a time that can reach the entrance of the specific passage TA during a certain period of time, and is set to 3.0 seconds, for example. In the long interval period, a range in which the game balls that have flowed down in front of the upper prize winning apparatus 434 after the end of the fifth round travel toward the entrance side of the specific passage TA, and the game balls are transported in the transport passage KT. Flowing down the connection passage KD including.

As described above, the shortest downflow time (for example, 3.6 seconds) is required before reaching the entrance of the specific passage TA via the connection passage KD. Therefore, the game ball is at the entrance of the specific passage TA with the shortest falling time (timing t2) after the end of the non-flowable period to the specific passage TA side in the fifth round as the shortest time (the shortest possible entry time). When the distribution mechanism 601 is controlled so as to include a certain period after the shortest possible entry period, a possible entry period during which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA occurs. The lower entry regulation solenoid 463 is turned on before the shortest possible entry time to start the sixth round, and after the sixth round is started, the game ball can flow down to the distribution mechanism 601 side.

Here, the length of the non-flowable period in the fifth round is approximately equal to the time (6.0 seconds) obtained by multiplying the allowable number of entry (10 pieces) into the upper special winning opening 434A in the fifth round by the firing time interval. The length of the non-flowable period is set longer than the shortest flow-down time (3.6 seconds). Therefore, when the fifth round is finished and the sixth round is started, there is no game ball between the upper and lower payout openings 433A and 434A corresponding to the connection passage KD. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed in front of the upper special winning opening 434A in the interval time before the execution of the fifth round from heading to the specific passage TA after the end of the fifth round. The length of the non-flowable period in the fifth round may be set to be longer than twice the firing time interval of the game ball with respect to the shortest flow time in consideration of variations in the flow time of the game ball. It is preferable that the firing time interval is set to be longer than four times.

When the long interval time elapses after the end of the fifth round, the sixth round starts. When the sixth round is started, there are no game balls in the connection passage KD, and the game balls following the last entry into the upper special winning opening 434A in the fifth round are upward toward the specific passage TA. It passes in front of the special winning opening 434A and progresses to the downstream side.

In the sixth round, the lower-winning prize device 433 and the sorting mechanism 601 operate. Specifically, in the sixth round, as shown in FIG. 34(A), the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 is turned on to start the lower prize winning apparatus 433 in the entry allowable posture, and FIG. 35(B). As shown in, during the sixth round, the game ball can enter the lower special winning opening 433A. Also, until a certain period (for example, 3.0 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the sixth round, the switching solenoid 465 is turned on, the distribution mechanism 601 is in the guiding posture, and the game ball enters the specific passage TA. It becomes possible.

Here, in the sixth round, the switching solenoid 465 is set so as to include a period after the shortest possible approaching period, and within a certain period (3.0 seconds) from just before the shortest possible approaching period. Turned on. Therefore, if the game balls continue to be fired before the end of the fifth round, the game balls following the last entry into the upper special winning opening 434A in the fifth round proceed toward the specific passage TA and are identified. Detected by passage switch 448. The lower entry regulation solenoid 463 and the switching solenoid 465 generate an enterable period at least in a state where the game ball can enter the specific passage TA after the shortest possible entry time. In, the game ball enters the specific passage TA and a V prize is generated.

In addition, in the sixth round, the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 and the switching solenoid 465 are operated to keep the game ball in the specific passage TA from the lower big winning device 433 for a certain period (hereinafter referred to as an enterable formation period). The length (3.0 seconds) is set to be shorter than the time (6.0 seconds) obtained by multiplying the allowable number of entries (10 pieces) into the upper prize hole 434A in the fifth round by the firing time interval. ing. As a result, a period during which the game ball does not advance to the specific passage TA side is generated in the inflow impossible period in the fifth round, and during the period in which the game ball does not advance to the specific passage TA side due to the inflow impossible period, “16R In the “big hit (V non-winning prize)”, an enterable formation period is generated. Therefore, in the "16R jackpot (V non-win)", when the lower special winning opening 433A and the entrance of the specific passage TA are open, the game ball does not reach the entrance of the lower large winning opening 433A, and goes to the specific passage TA. Can make a game ball inaccessible. Therefore, it is necessary that the non-flowing period in the fifth round is set to be sufficiently longer than the length of the enterable formation period in consideration of the variation in the flow time of the game ball, and the amount equal to twice the time interval for firing the game ball. The time is preferably set to be longer than (0.6 seconds) and is preferably set to be longer than four times (2.4 seconds).

When a fixed period (3.0 seconds) as the approachable formation period has elapsed from the start of the sixth round, the switching solenoid 465 is turned off while the lower approach restriction solenoid 463 remains on, and the approachable period ends. The game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening 433A is guided to the non-specific passage TB (see FIG. 35C) and detected by the non-specific passage switch 447. The winning of the game ball into the lower special winning opening 433A is detected by the lower special winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10) provided near the entrance of the lower special winning opening 433A, and the number of admissible entry balls (8) is lowered. The sixth round ends when the player enters the special winning opening 433A or when the maximum entry allowable time has elapsed from the start of the round.

In the seventh and subsequent rounds, the upper prize winning apparatus 434 takes the entry allowable posture again (see FIG. 33), and as in the first to fourth rounds, a predetermined entry allowable number (eight) of game balls are given a big prize. Each round ends when it is detected by the switch 443 or when the maximum entry allowable time elapses from the start of the round.

The round progresses to the final round (16th round) in the "16R jackpot (V prize)", and the special game state ends when the admissible number (8 balls) of game balls enter the upper large prize device 434 in the 16th round. To do. In the special game state of "16R jackpot (V prize)", if the game ball is continuously emitted by the right-handed game technique during the special game state, the game ball will surely enter the specific passage TA. The probability of entry is 100%. After the special game state ends, the probability variation game state is started because the game ball enters the specific passage TA and the V winning is generated during the special game state.

The "16R jackpot (V non-prize)" is different from the "16R jackpot (V prize)" only in the interval time from the end of the fifth round to the start of the sixth round, and the lower big prize device 433 and the upper big prize device 434. Other conditions such as the opening pattern (continuous opening) and the round end condition, the special game state proceeds according to the same condition. Therefore, in the following, only the difference between "16R jackpot (V prize)" and "16R jackpot (V non-prize)" will be described. Further, regarding the operation of the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 from the fifth round to the sixth round and the detection timing of the game ball by the large jackpot switch 444, "16R jackpot (V non-win)" and "16R jackpot (V win)" 34B, the illustration is omitted in FIG.

In the “16R jackpot (V non-prize)”, as shown in FIG. 34(B), the sixth round starts after a short short interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed from the end of the fifth round. , The lower prize winning device 433 takes the entry allowable posture, and the switching solenoid 465 is turned on until the fixed time (3.0 seconds) elapses from the start, and the sorting mechanism 601 opens the entrance of the specific passage TA. It is in an open guidance position.

In the "16R jackpot (V non-prize)", the game ball that has flowed in front of the upper-large prize winning device 434 after the end of the fifth round has passed the shortest run-down time (3.6 seconds) since the end of the fifth round ( The position at which the distribution mechanism 601 is provided does not arrive until after the shortest possible entry time). The period in which the distribution mechanism 601 takes the guiding posture is a fixed time (3.0 seconds) from the start of the sixth round, like the “16R big hit (V winning)”, and even if this time is set, “16R In the case of “big hit (V non-winning prize)”, the time length of the short interval is set so that the switching solenoid 465 is turned off at a timing earlier than the shortest possible entry time. Therefore, after the end of the fifth round, when the game ball enters the lower prize winning device 433 and reaches the distribution mechanism 601, the entrance of the specific passage TA is closed (see FIG. 35(C)), and the game is played. The sphere is guided to the non-specific passage TB.

In the "16R jackpot (V non-win)", the round progresses to the final round, and when the admissible number of game balls enter the upper jackpot 434, the special game state ends. In the “16R jackpot (non-V prize)”, the game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA during the special game state, and the probability that the game ball can enter the specific passage TA is 0%. When the special game state ends, because the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA during the special game state, the V-prize is not entered, so the time saving game state having a lower value for the player than the probability variation game state is started.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100, when the winning condition for winning the big hit lottery is satisfied, a special game state in which a plurality of (16) rounds are combined occurs, and a specific round in the special game state (sixth) is generated. When a game ball enters the specific passage TA in a round), a more favorable probability variation game state occurs than when the game ball does not enter the particular passage TA, and the occurrence of this probability variation game state is controlled by the main control board 920. It is controlled by the difference in interval time. Therefore, the control pattern for allowing or prohibiting the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA for a plurality of kinds of special game states can be made common except for the interval time, so that the control can be simplified and the specific passage can be achieved. The probability of the game ball entering the TA can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the probability of the game ball entering the specific passage TA that affects the transition of the game state while suppressing the cost increase of the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, in the specific round (sixth round), the upper prize winning apparatus 434 is provided on the upstream side with respect to the distribution mechanism 601 that can take the guiding posture in which the entrance to the specific passage TA is opened, and the upper right winning device 434 is provided immediately before the specific round. In the round (fifth round), the game ball whose traveling direction is controlled by the special winning device 434 has a predetermined number (8) of detection units (predetermined areas) of the special winning switch 444 provided inside the special winning opening 434A. After passing, the condition for ending the previous round is satisfied, and thereafter, the sorting mechanism 601 is controlled to the guiding posture and the specific round is started. Therefore, in the round immediately before the specific round, it is possible to control the flow down of the game balls on the rightward flow path KR leading to the specific passage TA by the operation of the upper special winning device 434, and the distribution mechanism 601 and the lower large winning in the specific round. Even if the operation control of the device 433 is the same, the length of the interval time (waiting time) before the start of the specific round can be made different to make the probability of the game ball entering the specific passage TA different.

In addition, when the sixth round as the specific round is started, the distribution mechanism 601 extends from before the timing when the game ball reaches the distribution mechanism 601 which is in the enterable state in the specific round and after the timing. As a control for continuing the shooting of the game ball so that the game ball can be reached, the admissible entry number in the fifth round is set to a number different from the previous rounds. The control for changing the allowable entry number is performed by the main control board 920, so that when the specific round is started, before the timing when the game ball reaches the distribution mechanism 601 which is in the enterable state in the specific round. Therefore, it is possible to easily continue the firing of the game ball so as to reach the distribution mechanism 601 after the timing. Therefore, in the special game state, the player intentionally stops the emission of the game ball at the timing when it is necessary to continue the emission of the game ball, and the distribution mechanism 601 is set in the enterable state in the specific round. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player is disadvantaged because the ball does not reach.

In addition, in order to continue the launch of the game ball so that the game ball can reach the distribution mechanism 601 from before the timing when the game ball reaches the distribution mechanism 601 which is in the enterable state in the specific round and after the timing. The control is not limited to the configuration in which the allowable entry number in the fifth round is made different from that in the previous round, and is realized by another control instead of the control in which the allowable entry number is made different, or in addition to the control. You may do it. For example, the interval time before the execution of the last round (fifth round) executed immediately before the specific round (sixth round) is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and compared with the short time. Thus, a special game state in which the interval time before the execution of one or a plurality of rounds executed before the immediately preceding round is set to a long time (for example, 2 seconds) may be generated. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation in which the use of the game ball is wasted is small even if the game ball is continuously emitted, and it is possible to easily continue the emission of the game ball. In this case, it is preferable that the short interval time set as the immediately preceding round is set to a time shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, because wasteful consumption of the game ball can be efficiently suppressed. ..

In addition, in order to continue the launch of the game ball so that it can reach the distribution mechanism 601 from before the timing when the game ball reaches the distribution mechanism 601 that is in the enterable state in the specific round and after that timing. As a control, with respect to the special game state that causes a specific round, the progress content of the special game state is common until the middle of the previous round, and the player can play the game by continuing to shoot the game ball in the previous round for a long time. You may make it generate|occur|produce another type of special game state which can obtain value. For example, in response to the "16R jackpot (V prize)", the winning device operates according to the same operation pattern and operation end condition as the particular round until the middle of the round immediately before the particular round, and in the immediately preceding round, the "16R jackpot". (V prize)”, the number of admission allowed is larger so that more game balls can enter the winning device, or the maximum admissible time in “16R big hit (V prize)” is shorter (for example, 4.2 seconds). ), a special game state in which a maximum entry allowable time longer than that time (for example, 6.0 seconds) is set may be generated.

Next, a case where a power failure occurs in a specific round in the special gaming state will be described. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a ball transfer device 602 on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601 capable of generating an enterable state in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA. The ball transfer device 602 holds a ball during a power failure in which a game ball that was flowing down the transfer path KT as a downflow path leading to the specific path TA is held in the transfer path KT as a predetermined range when a power failure occurs. It has a function.

Specifically, when the carry motor 624 operates at a constant speed under the control of the main control board 920 and a power failure occurs, the power supply to the carry motor 624 is stopped and the carry motor 624 stops. A power outage occurred in a situation (that is, within the interval time from the fifth round to the sixth round) that the game ball that was supposed to pass through the specific passage TA is flowing down the downflow route (transport passage KT) leading to the specific passage TA. In this case, the game ball can be held in the transfer passage KT by the ball transfer device 602.

After the pachinko machine 100 recovers power, the control of the special game state by the main control board 920 progresses and the control before the power failure is restarted, and the flow of the game ball toward the specific passage TA in accordance with the progress of the control. Is resumed. Therefore, in the special game state of the 16R big hit (V prize), it is possible to generate a situation in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA, as in the case where the power outage does not occur. In other words, when a power failure occurs within the interval time of the fifth round to the sixth round, if there is no ball holding function at the time of power failure, even if the game ball is rushed after the power is restored, it reaches the entrance of the specific passage TA. Although the specific passage TA is in an inaccessible state and cannot be in time before, such a situation can be avoided by holding the game ball in the transfer passage KT by the ball holding function during a power failure. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where a player who has been playing the game legally due to an unexpected situation suffers a disadvantage.

Further, the ball transfer device 602 can hold the game ball at a plurality of locations along the transfer path KT where the ball transfer unit 623 can support the game ball, in the transfer path KT as a flow-down path leading to the specific path TA. Therefore, the game ball can be held at a plurality of points of the transport passage KT. For this reason, if some of the game balls held in the transport passage KT have a power outage at a timing when they can enter the specific passage TA, the game balls are held at a plurality of locations in the transport passage KT and identified before the power outage. It is possible to allow the game ball that was able to enter the passage TA to enter the specific passage TA and prevent the other game balls from entering the specific passage. Also, in the special game state of 16R jackpot (V non-win), it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing down at the most upstream end of the transfer passage KT, so during the short interval from the fifth round to the sixth round. When a power failure occurs, the game ball is held on the upstream side, which is sufficiently separated from the specific passage TA, so that the game ball does not reach the specific passage TA in a state where the specific passage TA can enter. can do. In this way, the situation of whether or not the game ball flows down to the specific passage TA corresponding to the transition control of the game state decided before the power failure is saved in the game area, and the flow down of the game ball is restored after the power restoration. Can be made easier.

Further, on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601, there is provided an upper prize winning device 434 capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the specific passage TA side, and the ball transfer device 602 is arranged from the upper prize winning device 434. The game ball is held in the transfer passage KT located on the downstream side and on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601. For this reason, it is possible to efficiently hold the game balls heading to the specific passage TA only during the power outage by limiting the game balls that flow down to the distribution mechanism 601 side by the upper prize winning device 434, and the game state determined before the power outage. It is possible to efficiently restore the flow down of the game ball corresponding to the transfer control of after the power failure. Here, when the game ball is configured to be held on the upstream side of the upper prize winning device 434, the game ball is stopped in the right-side downflow route KR including the game ball that enters the upper prize winning device 434. Will be made. If the game balls that are not involved in the entry of the specific passage TA are to be held in the game area during the power outage, there is a high possibility that unexpected misconduct or the like will occur. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a ball holding function at the time of power failure on the downstream side of the special winning device 434 in order to exert the ball holding function only in the minimum necessary game balls.

Further, the ball transfer device 602 exerts a ball holding function during a power failure even in a special game state where it should not enter the specific passage TA, saves the situation before the power failure, and enters the game ball into the specific passage TA after the power failure. It can be disabled. In this case, it is preferable that a fraud prevention function is provided so that the position where the game ball is held is not illegally moved. For example, the front cover 612 is part of the base 611 of the winning device unit 600. By covering the transfer passage KT, an illegal contact for moving the holding position of the game ball is prevented.

In addition, as a fraud prevention function, other configuration may be provided instead of the front cover 612 or in addition to the front cover 612. For example, the belt 621 is rotated by a sensor that detects the rotational position of the belt 621. The position is backed up when a power failure occurs, and control is performed to confirm the position of the belt 621 in the startup process after power recovery, and if the rotational position has moved, it is an error, and then the game ball enters the specific passage TA. The main control board 920 may perform a predetermined process exemplified as a process of adding a certain penalty such as invalidating the above to provide a fraud prevention function.

In addition, the ball holding function at the time of power failure has a ball holding function of holding the game ball not only on the upstream side of the lower big prize device 433 but also on the downstream side closer to the distribution mechanism 601 than the entrance of the lower big prize device 433. In this case, the situation before the power failure can be saved in more detail and can be restored after the power recovery, which is preferable.

Next, the control relating to the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA in the case where a predetermined abnormal launch condition occurs in the special game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 100, in the special game state of the 16R jackpot (V prize) in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the emission of the game ball by the emission device 330. Detects and stops the progress of the game by temporarily stopping the special game state when an abnormal firing condition is detected, and then, when the abnormal firing condition is released, a control that advances the game that stopped the progress An abnormality response control function for performing the above is provided.

Specifically, as an abnormality response control function, the game board 400 is provided with a right hit detection switch 603 in the upstream side portion of the game area, as shown in FIG. 7. The right hit detection switch 603 is provided at a position where all the game balls that the game ball passes by the right hitting game method executed in the special game state can be detected. The right hit detection switch 603 is composed of a non-contact type sensor that detects passage of a game ball and is connected to the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10).

Further, the main control board 920 is provided with a timer update processing S1210 of the main control board 920, an upper-winning-permission-allowing processing S1309, and an upper-winning-winning processing S1310 as each processing as an abnormality handling control function. These processes are stored in the ROM (not shown) as a part of the control program of the main control board 920. Hereinafter, the abnormality handling control by the main control board 920 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer update processing S1210 of the main control board 920. In the timer update process S1210, it is determined whether or not the temporary stop flag is set (S2001), and if the temporary stop flag is not set (S2001:N), the process of updating the special symbol related control timer is executed. (S2002). On the other hand, if the pause flag is not set, the special symbol related control timer is not updated, and the process proceeds to S2003. In the process of S2003, the timer other than the special symbol related control timer is updated, and the timer updating process is ended.

Here, the pause flag is set when the game ball is not normally fired by the right-handed gaming method at the timing that affects whether or not the game ball can enter the specific area in the specific round including the specific round. Is a flag that is turned on by a part of the RAM of the main control board 920. The switching of the temporary stop flag between on and off will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the process S1309 of the main control board 920 during the upper prize winning, and FIG. 38 is a flow chart of an example of the process S1310 of the main control board 920 during the upper special prize prohibition. Upper prize winning allowable processing S1309 and upper prize winning prohibition processing S1310 are stored in the ROM of the main control board 920 as a part of the special symbol related processing S1217 that constitutes a part of the main control interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). Remembered

Upper prize winning permission processing S1309 is processing for generating a special game state, and the upper entry restricting mechanism 454 takes an entry allowance posture so that a game ball can enter the upper prize opening 434A. It is executed in the situation from the timing to the end of the round. The upper winning award allowing process S1309 is set to start at the end of the process corresponding to the opening period by the large winning device operation starting process S1306 (see FIG. 18), and the first round is started. In addition, the upper prize winning permitting process S1309 is performed after the operation of the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 is prohibited by the lower prize winning prohibition process S1308 or the upper prize winning prohibition process S1310 (see FIG. 18). Even if the interval time elapses in the above condition, the start setting is performed when the next round is started. In the setting of the start of the process S1309 in the upper prize winning, the special winning device operation start process S1306, the lower big prize prohibition process S1308, or the upper special prize prohibition process S1310 is related to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol related process S1217. This is done by updating the value of the state identification value.

In the winning upper prize winning processing S1309, first, it is determined whether or not the temporary stop flag is set (S2101). If the temporary stop flag is not set (S2101:N), the specific round pre-flag is set. It is determined whether it has been done (S2102). The flag before the specific round affects whether or not the game ball can enter the specific passage TA during a certain period including a part of the specific round (sixth round) in which the sorting mechanism 601 operates to open the entrance of the specific passage TA. The flag is set (turned on) at a timing (hereinafter, referred to as a specific passage side traveling period) and is configured by a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

In the process of S2102, if the pre-specific round flag is not set (S2102:N), the situation is still before or after the specific passage side progress period. In this case, it is determined whether or not it is the immediately preceding round (fifth round) of the specific round (S2103), and if it is the immediately preceding round (S2103: Y), the allowable entry number in that round is "3". It is determined whether or not (S2104). In the previous round, since the game ball that has been launched after the allowable entry number becomes “3” is the game ball that may be able to enter the specific passage TA in the pachinko machine 100, in the present embodiment, The flag before a specific round is set at the timing when the allowable number becomes "3".

In the process of S2104, when it is determined that the allowable entry number is “3” (S2104:Y), the specific round before flag is set, and the process proceeds to S2115. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2103 that it is not the round immediately before the specific round (S2103: N), or the process is the round immediately before the specific round in the process of S2104, it is determined that the allowable entry number is still “4” or more. If so (S2104:N), the process of S2105 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2115.

In the process of S2102, when it is determined that the flag before the specific round is set (S2102: Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the right hit detection switch 603 (S2106), and the right hit is performed. If the game ball has passed through the detection switch 603 (S2106: Y), the firing stop time measurement counter is reset (S2107). The firing stop time measurement counter is a counter for measuring the time during which the game ball is not flowing down the right-side downflow route KR in the specific passage side traveling period, and is configured by a part of the RAM of the main control board 920. ..

In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the right hit detection switch 603 (S2106: N), the firing stop time measurement counter is incremented by "1" and updated (S2108). The upper prize winning permissible process S1309 is executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, and is executed at regular time intervals (2 ms). Therefore, in a situation where the rightward downflow route KR is not flowing down during the specific passage side traveling period, the firing stop time measurement counter is incremented and updated by "1" every 2 ms.

After the processing of S2108, it is determined whether or not the firing stop time measurement counter has reached a value ("3000 or more") corresponding to no passing of the game ball for 6.0 seconds or more as the firing abnormal state (S2109), 6 If it is determined that there is no passage for 0.0 seconds or more (S2109: Y), the temporary stop flag is set (S2110), the operation of the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is released, and the game ball cannot enter the upper special winning opening 434A. The following process is executed (S2111). This completes the preparation for temporarily stopping the progress of the special game state in the round immediately before the specific round. In the situation where the pause flag is set, as described above, the updating process of the special symbol related control timer is skipped in the timer updating process S1210, and the special symbol related control timer is maintained at the same value, The progress of the special game state will be temporarily stopped.

In the processing of S2101, when it is determined that the pause flag is set (S2101: Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the right hit detection switch 603 (S2112). In the process of S2112, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the right hit detection switch 603 (S2112: N), the processes of S2113 and S2114 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2115.

In the process of S2112, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the right hit detection switch 603 (S2112: Y), the process of canceling the pause flag (turning it off) is executed (S2113), and After the entry restriction solenoid 464 is returned to the operating state and the game ball can enter the upper special winning opening 434A (S2114), the process proceeds to S2115. Here, when the game ball passes through the right hit detection switch 603 in the situation where the pause flag is set, it means that the abnormal launch condition has been canceled, and in this case, the processing of S2113 and S2114 By execution, the progress of the special game state, which was temporarily stopped in the round immediately before the specific round, is resumed.

In the processing after S2115, first, the allowable entry number update processing S2115 for updating the allowable entry number is executed. In the allowable entry number update process S2115, a counter corresponding to the allowable entry number (a part of the RAM of the main control board 920) at the timing when the upper special winning switch 444 detects the entry of the game ball into the upper special winning opening 434A. The value of is updated to the value obtained by subtracting the winning amount of one ball.

After the processing of S2115, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the special symbol related control timer is released (S2116). The special symbol related control timer is set to a value corresponding to the time length of the round and interval before the start of each round and interval, and is updated (for example, by subtracting until the time elapses in the timer update process). It is a timer that is updated) and is configured by a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

In the process of S2116, if the special symbol related control timer is released (S2116: Y), it is the timing when the maximum entry allowable time has elapsed in the running round, so the operation of the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 is released. After entering the game balls into the upper prize winning apparatus 434 and executing a round end setting process for setting to shift to the next period (S2118), the upper prize winning permitting process S1309 is ended.

In the process of S2116, if the special symbol-related control timer is not released (S2116: N), it is determined whether or not the admissible entry number in the running round is "0" (S2117), and "0". If there is (S2117: Y), it is the timing of the end of the round, so the process moves to the round end setting processing (S2118). If the allowable entry number is "1" or more in the process of S2115 (S2117:N), it is the timing to continue the round that is still being executed. Therefore, the round end setting process S2118 is skipped and the upper prize winning acceptable process is performed. The step S1309 is ended.

Here, in the round end setting process S2118, if the next round in the special game state is the end of the first round to the fifteenth round, the value of the special symbol related state identification value is a process during the upper prize winning prohibition process. The value is updated to the value “7” corresponding to S1310, and the setting for shifting to the interval time is performed (see FIG. 18). On the other hand, if the 16th round is over, the value of the special symbol related state identification value is updated to the value “8” corresponding to the special winning device operation stop process S1311 (see FIG. 18) for shifting to the ending period. It Further, in the round end setting process S2118, the value of the special symbol related control timer is set to a value corresponding to the interval time or the length of the ending period. Immediately before the specific round, setting of interval times of different lengths corresponding to a plurality of types of special game states, in this round end setting processing S2118, refer to the stop symbol identification value corresponding to the type of special game state. Done.

The process S1310 for prohibiting a prize to be won is a process executed during the interval time after the operation of the device for award winning big prize 434 is prohibited, and is performed between the fifth round and the sixth round, which is immediately before the specific round. This is processing executed during the interval period.

In the processing for processing during upper prize winning prohibition S1310, as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether or not the pause flag is set (S2201), and if the pause flag is not set (S2201:N). Then, it is determined whether or not the specific round before flag is set (S2202). The specific round pre-flag is set when the special winning pre-permission process S1309 is executed in the immediately preceding round (fifth round) of the specific round (sixth round), and therefore when the specific round pre-flag is set. Indicates an interval period immediately before the specific round (hereinafter, also referred to as an immediately preceding interval period), and if not set, another interval period.

In the process of S2202, if the flag before the specific round is not set (S2202: N), since it is not the immediately preceding interval period, each process of S2203 to S2211 necessary for the immediately preceding interval period is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2231. ..

In the process of S2202, if the flag before the specific round is set (S2202: Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the right hit detection switch 603 (S2203), and the right hit detection switch 603 is set. If is passed (S2203: Y), the firing stop time measurement counter is reset, and then the process proceeds to S2208.

In the process of S2203, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the right hit detection switch 603 (S2203: N), the firing stop time measurement counter is incremented by "1" (S2205), and the update is performed. It is determined whether or not there is no passage of the game ball for 6.0 seconds or more by the later firing stop time measurement counter (S2206), and if it is determined that there is no passage of 6.0 seconds or more (S2206:Y), the game is temporarily stopped. A flag is set (S2207), and the process proceeds to S2208.

In the process of S2208, it is determined whether the interval time measurement counter has reached a value corresponding to 1.0 second or more (S2208). The interval time measurement counter is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the immediately preceding interval, and is composed of a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

In the process of S2208, if the interval time measurement counter does not have a value corresponding to 1.0 seconds or more (S2208:N), it is not 1.0 seconds or more and less than 1.0 seconds after the start of the immediately preceding interval. is there. In this case, the interval time measurement counter is updated (for example, "1" is added and updated) (S2209), and the process proceeds to S2231.

On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if the interval time measurement counter has a value corresponding to 1.0 second or more (S2208: Y), it means that 1.0 seconds or more has elapsed since the start of the immediately preceding interval. In this case, the interval measurement counter is reset (S2210), the specific round pre-flag is released (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2231.

In the processing of S2201, when it is determined that the pause flag is set (S2201:Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the right hit detection switch 603 (S2221). In the process of S2221, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the right hit detection switch 603 (S2221: N), the process of S2222 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2231.

In the process of S2221, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the right hit detection switch 603 (S2221: Y), the process of canceling the pause flag (turning it off) is executed (S2222), and the process is S2231. Transition to.

In the process of S2231, it is determined whether it is the timing when the special symbol related control timer is released (S2231), and if the special symbol related control timer is not released (S2231: N), the interval period is continued. Therefore, the process of S2232 is skipped, and the process S1310 during prohibition of upper prize is ended.

In the process of S2231, when it is determined that it is the timing when the special symbol related control timer is released (S2231: Y), it is the timing when the interval ends and the next round is started. After executing the round start setting process for performing the setting for shifting (S2232), the process S1310 during the upper prize winning prohibition is ended.

Here, the operation of the pachinko machine 100 when an abnormal launch state occurs will be described. In the pachinko machine 100, when the situation where the game ball cannot be launched during the special game state of the 16R jackpot (V prize), the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA and should occur after the special game state. The player cannot receive the privilege due to the probability variation game state. The abnormal launching state of the game ball can occur under various conditions such as a ball clogging at the entrance of the game area, a failure of the launching device 330, or a trouble of supplying the game ball to the pachinko machine 100. In a situation where this kind of abnormal launch condition occurs, if a possible entry period of the game ball into the specific passage TA occurs, to the probability variation game state obtained by winning the lottery related to the special symbol The opportunity to enjoy the gaming value of the transition is invalidated, and the player may be disadvantaged.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, after the round immediately before the specific round in the special gaming state is started, when the allowable entry number becomes “3” as the remaining time of the round, The flag before a specific round is set. When the flag before the specific round is set, the flow down of the game ball on the rightward downflow route KR is monitored by the state confirmation of the right hit detection switch 603 in the upper prize winning permitting process S1309 and the upper prize winning prohibition process S1310. (Processing of S2106 and S2203).

In the situation where the flag before the specific round is set, if the right hit detection switch 603 does not detect passage of the game ball for a certain time (6.0 seconds) or more, the pause flag is set and the special game state is set. Progress is stopped. The progress of the special game state is stopped by not updating the special symbol-related control timer, but by deactivating the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 (S2111).

The situation where the pause flag is set is canceled when it is detected that the game ball passes through the right hit detection switch 603. As a result, the progress of the special game state is resumed in the situation where the game ball is fired again. In the previous round of the specific round and in the immediately preceding interval after that, it is possible to temporarily stop the special game state by setting the temporary stop flag, and at the start of the specific round, the situation where the game ball does not head to the specific passage TA occurs. Hard to do.

In this way, when the special game state of the 16R jackpot (V prize) occurs and the game ball is not normally fired and the abnormal firing state occurs, at least part of the progress of the game is stopped. For this reason, it is easy to avoid a situation where the game ball is not launched in an enterable period in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, and it is easy to avoid a situation where the player who is playing the game legally suffers a disadvantage. be able to.

Further, the right-handedness detection switch 603 for detecting an abnormal firing state is provided in a part of the game area and upstream of the distribution mechanism 601 and the upper prize winning apparatus 434. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately detect the situation where the game ball is not flowing down to the distribution mechanism 601 side, and when the abnormal launch condition occurs, it is possible to appropriately execute the control corresponding to the situation.

In addition, when the abnormal launch condition occurs in the immediately preceding round of the specific round, even if the game ball is not flowing down the rightward flow path KR, the operation of the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is canceled to obtain the first prize. Prevent the game ball from entering the mouth 434A. Therefore, it is possible to temporarily stop the appearance of an advantageous state for the player, and it is misleading that an advantageous state for which the winning condition is easily established is longer than that of other players. Without doing so, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a player who is playing the game legally suffers a disadvantage.

Further, regardless of whether or not the player has performed a shooting operation, it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the game area by the right-hand hit detection switch 603 for a certain period of time. Therefore, a player unfamiliar with the game is unprepared. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the firing operation is stopped and the disadvantage is suffered.

Next, a description will be given of an improper entry suppression function for preventing the game ball from improperly entering the specific passage TA in the special game state of 16R big hit (V non-winning prize). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a ball transfer device 602 on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601 capable of generating an enterable state in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA. In the event of a power failure, the ball transfer device 602 holds the game balls that were flowing down the transfer path KT as a flow-down path leading to the specific path TA in the transfer path KT as a predetermined range, thereby, The 16R jackpot (V non-win prize) in the special game state exerts an illegal entry suppression function of suppressing the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA.

Specifically, when the main control board 920 is temporarily out of power during a short interval of 16R big hit (V non-win), the game ball flowing down the transfer passage KT is transferred to the specific passage TA. It stays there without approaching. If the transport passage KT is a downwardly inclined passage that approaches the specific passage TA due to the weight of the game balls, the game balls approach the specific passage TA during the power outage, and after the power is restored, the short passage occurs. A situation may occur in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA despite passing through the interval.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in order for the game ball to go to the specific passage TA via the transfer passage KT, it is necessary to energize the ball transfer device 602. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the game ball unintentionally enters the specific passage TA due to the occurrence of a power failure during the special game state of the 16R big hit (V non-winning prize).

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment different from the above embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as the first embodiment) will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, by using the special winning device 434, the sorting mechanism 601, and the ball transfer device 602, a specific round in which an enterable state in which the specific passage TA can be entered is generated. A special game state including was realized. In the second embodiment, the ball transfer device 602 is not provided, and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA by a mechanism that allows the game ball to flow down by its own weight between the upper prize winning device 434 and the distribution mechanism 601. It is configured to generate a specific round.

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a game board 1400 according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 39, for ease of understanding, the lower entry regulation mechanism 1453 in the entry permitted posture and the distribution mechanism 1601 in the guidance posture are shown by a chain line. In the following description of the second embodiment, only parts different from the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described.

Two big winning devices 1433 and 1434 are provided on the right side downflow route KR on the right side of the front surface of the game board 1400 so as to be separated from each other on the upstream side and the downstream side. The upper front part of the game board 1400 is provided with an upper prize winning device 1434 having the same configuration as the upper prize winning device 434 according to the above embodiment, and the lower right part of the front face of the game board 1400 is provided with the above embodiment. The lower special prize device 433 having the same structure as that of the lower special prize device 433 and having the specific passage TA set therein is provided. The upper and lower big winning devices 1433 and 1434 are respectively provided with upper and lower entry restriction mechanisms 1453 and 1454 which take an entry prohibited posture and an entry permitted posture so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter. The entry control solenoid that changes the value is controlled by main controller 370 (main control board 920). As a result, with respect to each of the big winning devices 1433 and 1434, it is possible to allow the game balls to enter the upper and lower winning holes 1433A and 1434A as the respective entrance portions.

A distribution mechanism 1601 having the same configuration as the distribution mechanism 601 according to the above-described embodiment is provided inside the lower prize winning device 1433 (lower prize hole 1433A). Further, a starting device 1436 and a right starting winning device 1432 are provided in the upstream side portion and the downstream side portion along the right side downflow route KR in which the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A are arranged. The starting device 1436 has the same configuration as the starting device 436 according to the above embodiment, and the right starting winning device 1432 is configured to operate so that a game ball can enter the rear side of the game area. It is different from the right start winning device 432 according to the embodiment.

The connection passage KD corresponding to the passage portion between the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A provided in the upper and lower big winning devices 1433 and 1434 has a game ball that has passed through the front side of the upper big winning opening 1434A to the lower big winning opening 1433A. It is configured such that a predetermined time or more (in the present modification, the shortest flow-down time set to 3.0 seconds) elapses before reaching. The connection passage KD is provided with a downflow delay unit 1435 that delays downflow of the game ball. The flow-down delay portion 1435 is formed by bending right and left, and the bottom surface of the flow path of the game ball is formed at a gentle downward inclination (for example, 10 degrees or less).

On the lower left side of the upper prize winning device 1434, a discharge port 1438 through which a game ball can enter is provided. The discharge port 1438 is an entrance portion of a recovery discharge passage through which the game balls that have entered the game area are discharged to the outside without winning. The game ball which is off to the left side when viewed from the front in the peripheral portion of the upper prize winning device 1434 and the upper side thereof is configured to enter the discharge port 1438. Therefore, in the situation where the game is performed by the right-handed game technique, the probability that the game ball will enter the enterable upper prize hole 1434A is not set to 100%, and the lower prize hole 1433A is won through the downflow delay unit 1435. The probability is not 100%. As a setting, when the right-handed game method is used, the game ball enters (wins) the upper prize hole 1434A with a probability of approximately 99% or more in a situation where the game ball can enter the upper prize hole 1434A, Further, in a situation where the game ball cannot enter the upper prize hole 1434A, the game ball flows down the downflow delay portion 1435 with a probability of approximately 99% or more, and in a situation where the game ball can enter the lower prize hole 1433A, it is substantially It is preferable to set the game balls to enter (win) the lower special winning opening 1433A with a probability of 99% or more.

In a situation in which the upper and lower big winning devices 1433 and 1434 are in the entry prohibited posture (vertical entry prohibited state), the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A are closed so that they cannot enter. In the vertical entry prohibited state, as shown in FIG. 39(A), the game ball shot to the right of the game area passes through the front side of the upper special winning opening 1434A and flows down to the downstream side. Then, the game ball moves downward while moving back and forth through the flow-down delay portion 1435, passes through the entrance portion of the lower special winning opening 1433A, and flows down to the downstream side.

In a situation in which the upper-winning prize device 1434 is in the entry permitted posture (upper entry permitted state), as shown in FIG. 39(B), the opening/closing plate portion constituting the entry regulation mechanism 1454 tilts from the standing posture to the front side. It projects into the game area. As a result, the game ball enters the upper special winning opening 1434A opening on the rear side of the game area to prevent the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side, and the game ball advances to the side where the lower large winning opening 1433A is provided. It will not be flown (state that cannot flow down). When the unflowable state continues for a certain time or longer, no game ball exists in the connection passage KD corresponding to the portion between the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A.

When the upper special prize device 1434 shifts to the entry prohibition posture after the upper entry permission state continues for a certain period of time, the game ball starts flowing down to the downstream side after passing through the front side of the upper special prize opening 1434A. After the upper prize winning device 1434 shifts to the entry prohibited posture and after the shortest flow-down time has elapsed, the game ball reaches the lower prize hole 1433A. For this reason, even if the upper-side entry allowable state ends, before the shortest flow-down time elapses, the game ball cannot enter the lower-large winning opening 1433A even if the lower-large winning award device 1433 takes the entry-allowed posture. After the flow-down time has elapsed, the game ball can enter the lower-large prize winning device 1433.

In the situation where the lower-large prize winning apparatus 1433 is in the entry-permitting posture (lower-side entry-permitting state), as shown in FIG. 39(C), the opening/closing plate portion constituting the lower entry-regulating mechanism 1453 is projected forward. It is stored in the rear of the game area by immersing it in the rear. As a result, the game ball can enter the lower special winning opening 1433A that opens upward.

The upper and lower big prize devices 1433 and 1434 and the distribution mechanism 1601 according to the present modification are similar to the main control boards for the control of the upper and lower big prize devices 433 and 434 and the distribution mechanism 601 according to the above-described embodiment. The operation is controlled by 920. As a result, the game ball is moved to the specific passage TA by making the interval time immediately before the specific round different from the special game state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA in the specific round (sixth round). It is possible to generate a special game state that cannot enter.

Also, inside the rightward downflow route KR and inside the lower big winning device 1433 (lower big winning opening 1433A), it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing down by projecting intermittently from the back side of the route into the route. Projecting pieces S1 to S5 are provided. The movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 are operated by the control of the main control board 920, and can be operated by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown) that moves out of the path in the ON state. The movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 operate in a cycle of a game ball firing time interval or less (for example, 0.55 seconds), and have a ball interval generation function of flowing down the game balls one by one in a state of being separated toward the downstream side. I have it. As a result, the game balls interfere with each other while the game balls are flowing down due to their own weight in the flow-down delay unit 1435, and the game balls cannot flow down to the downstream side, or the flow-down delay unit 1435 is extremely slowly moved to the game ball. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball will flow down, and the game ball can be flowed down to the specific passage TA at an appropriate timing. The movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 retreat from the flow path of the game ball during the power failure, and the game ball flows down to the downstream side.

Here, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, in the 16R big hit (V non-win prize) special game state, an improper entry suppression function for preventing the game ball from unjustly entering the specific passage TA, and the 16R big hit (V There is a power outage avoidance function that avoids a situation where a game ball that should have entered the specific passage TA is invalidated due to a power outage just before the start of a specific round, unless a power outage occurs in the special game state of (prize) ing.

The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is provided with a power failure monitoring processing S9202 that continuously executes a part of the processing even during a power failure state. The pachinko machine power outage monitoring process S9202 according to the second embodiment is configured by adding a part of the process to the power outage monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) according to the first embodiment. The power outage monitoring process S9202 corresponds to the illegal entry suppression function and the power outage avoidance function in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the power outage monitoring process S9202 according to the second embodiment. In the power outage monitoring process S9202, first, it is determined whether or not the power outage preparation flag is on (S9001), and if the power outage preparation flag is not on, it is determined whether or not the power outage signal is output (S9002). The power failure preparation flag is a flag that is turned on when it is confirmed that the power failure signal is continuously output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 to the main control board 920 in three confirmations, and the RAM of the main control board 920. It is composed of a part of. When the power failure preparation flag is turned on, some boards will be in a state of waiting for power off after performing some processing such as completion of paying out game balls in the middle of paying out as processing corresponding to the occurrence of power failure, pachinko machine Control the power consumed in.

In the process of S9002, when it is determined that the power failure signal is being output (S9002: Y), the power failure signal is being transmitted to the main control board 920. In this case, the value of the power failure signal counter is updated (for example, "1" is added and updated) (S9003), and it is determined whether the updated value has reached "3" (S9004). The power failure signal counter is a counter for counting the number of times the output of the power failure signal is confirmed, and is configured by a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

In the process of S9004, when it is determined that the value of the power failure signal counter is “3” or more (S9004:Y), the process proceeds to the process corresponding to the power failure occurrence in S9007 and thereafter. On the other hand, in the processing of S9004, when it is determined that the value of the power failure signal counter has not reached “3” (S9004: N), the power failure monitoring processing S9202 is ended.

In the processing of S9002, when it is determined that the power failure signal is not being output (S9002:N), the power is being normally supplied, and in this case, the value of the power failure signal counter is "0". (S9005), if it is not “0” (S9005:N), the power failure signal counter is set to “0” and reset (S9006), and the power failure monitoring processing S9202 ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S9005, when it is determined that the value of the power failure signal counter is “0” (S9005:Y), the processing of S9006 is skipped, and the power failure monitoring processing S9202 ends.

By the processing of S9002 to S9006, when the power failure signal is turned on three times in a row, it is determined that a power failure state has occurred, the power failure preparation flag is turned on, and each processing corresponding to the power failure state can be executed. ing.

In the processing of S9004, when it is determined that the value of the power failure signal counter is “3” or more (S9004: Y), “0” is set to the power failure signal counter (S9007), and the payout control board 930 and the sub controller A power-off command is transmitted to the control board 940 (S9008). Upon receipt of the power-off command, the payout control board 930 and the sub-control board 940 perform only the minimum necessary processing during the execution to quickly prepare for power-off, and the payout control board 930 and the sub-control board 940 The control stops the control of electric components and elements that require electric power.

After the processing of S9008, the power failure preparation flag is turned on (S9009), and it is determined whether or not the specific round before flag is set (S9010). If the pre-specific round flag is set (S9010:Y), the power outage monitoring process S9202 is terminated, and the main control board 920 continues the process before the power outage as it is.

In the processing of S9010, when it is determined that the flag before the specific round is not set (S9010:N), it is determined whether or not it is in the immediately preceding interval (S9011), and if it is in the immediately preceding interval (S9011). : Y), the power failure monitoring process S9202 ends. In the processing of S9011, if it is determined that the preceding interval is not in progress (S9011: N), it is determined whether or not the switching solenoid 465 is operating (S9012), and if the switching solenoid 465 is operating ( (S9012:Y), and the power failure monitoring process S9202 is ended.

By the processing of S9010 to S9012, before the end of the round immediately before the specific round, the specific round is started and the switching solenoid 465 operates, and until the end of the approachable period in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, The control board 920 can continuously execute each process related to the progress of the special gaming state without preparing for a power outage. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs just before the specific round, in the 16R jackpot (V non-win prize) special game state, the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, and the 16R jackpot (V prize) special game state. In, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the specific passage TA.

In the processing of S9012, when it is determined that the switching solenoid 465 is not in operation (S9012), the power failure preparation flag is turned off (S9013), and a power-off command is transmitted to the power/fire control board 900 to power/fire. The control board 900 is prepared for the process corresponding to the power failure (S9014), the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored (S9015), the RAM access is prohibited (S9016), and the process enters an infinite loop.

In the process of S9001, if the power failure preparation flag is determined to be on (S9001:Y), the process proceeds to S9010 (S9001:Y). As a result, the main control board 920 does not prepare for a power failure only during the period from before the end of the round immediately before the specific round to the end of the enterable period in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA in the specific round. Thus, each process relating to the progress of the special gaming state can be continuously executed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, when the predetermined power failure state in which the power failure monitoring process S9202 continuously confirms the power failure signal three times is detected, the game ball is moved to the specific passage TA. The control for advancing the special game state is executed in a period including an enterable period in which an enterable state is generated in which the switching solenoid 465 operates so as to enter. Therefore, even in the situation where the power outage occurs, the control for advancing the special game state is executed during a certain period including the enterable period. Therefore, the game ball, which should have entered the specific passage TA, does not enter the specific passage TA due to the occurrence of the power outage, so that the player who was playing the game legally suffers a disadvantage or the criminal intentionally loses power. It is possible to avoid a situation where a fraudulent attempt is made to generate a game ball and unfairly enter the specific passage TA.

When a predetermined power failure state occurs, a power-off command is transmitted to the sub control board 940 before the power failure preparation flag is turned on, and the sub-control board 940 causes the decorative pattern display device 479 to operate. The control is stopped prior to a part of the control including the operation control of the distribution mechanism 601 and the special winning device 434 by the main control board 920. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the power consumption due to the display control of the decorative symbol display device 479, and allocate that amount to a part of the controls including the control of the distribution mechanism 601 and the special winning device 434. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the progress of the game in the special game state relating to the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA by using the limited electric power.

In addition, when the switching solenoid 465 is turned on in the specific round to control the distribution mechanism 601 to generate the enterable state, even before the start of the enterable state starts even if a predetermined power outage occurs. During the period until the switching solenoid 465 is turned off and the enterable state ends, the power outage preparation flag is maintained in the on state by each processing of S9010 to S9012, and the special symbol related control timer corresponding to the progress of the special gaming state. The value of is continuously updated by the timer update process S1210 (see FIG. 36). Since the special game state will be advanced by the update of this special symbol related control timer, it is possible to suppress the influence of the occurrence of a power outage on the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA, and the inconvenience caused by the occurrence of a power outage is preferable. It can be easily avoided.

By the power outage monitoring process S9202, each process of the main control board 920 does not necessarily have to proceed in the same manner as before the power outage monitoring, and at least the process related to the update of the special symbol related control timer is executed, and the 16R jackpot (V In the non-winning special game state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the specific passage TA, which is preferable.

Next, a pachinko machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine according to the third embodiment is provided with a lower large prize winning device 2433 having an improper entry suppression function of suppressing the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA in the special game state of the 16R big hit (V non-win prize). There is. The lower major winning device 2433 has a mechanism different from the lower major winning devices 433 and 1433 according to the first and second embodiments, and when only one game ball enters the specific passage TA by the distribution mechanism 601. Does not become a V prize, and when a plurality of game balls enter the specific passage TA, the game ball advances toward the V area side as a specific area and a V prize is generated.

FIG. 41(A) to FIG. 41(D) are explanatory views of the lower prize winning device 2433 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. 41(B) to 41(D), for ease of understanding, the direction in which the game ball flows down is illustrated by an arrow, and the game ball is also shown, and the lower entry regulation is set to the entry allowable posture. The mechanism 453, the distribution mechanism 601 that is in the guiding posture, and the closing operation mechanism 2001 that exits from the passage of the game ball are shown by a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 41(A), the lower major winning device 2433 is provided with a lower entry restricting mechanism 453 at the entrance of the lower major winning opening 433A, and the sorting mechanism 601 is provided inside the lower major winning opening 433A. Has been. On the lower side of the distribution mechanism 601 which corresponds to the inside of the distribution mechanism 601, the downstream side of the specific passage TA branches in a plurality of directions, and the game ball does not flow down preferentially (on the right side of FIG. 41(A)). The specific passage TA is configured to connect to the lower side). A V region (region marked with the letter "V" in FIG. 41(A)) as a specific region is provided in a region continuous to the lower right side of the specific passage TA, and is bent continuously from the left side to the left side. The passage is continuous with the non-specific passage TA (the area side marked with the letter "N" in FIG. 41(A)). A specific passage switch is provided on the downstream side branched to the V area side (not shown), and when a game ball reaches the V area, a V winning is generated.

Inside the distribution mechanism 601, a closing operation mechanism 2001 that can close the non-specific passage TA from the specific passage TA is provided. The closing operation mechanism 2001 operates in synchronization with the distribution mechanism 601 under the control of the main control board 920. The closing operation mechanism 2001 opens the passage leading to the non-specific area when the switching solenoid 465 is turned on and the distribution mechanism 601 is in the guiding posture, that is, when the game ball can enter the specific passage TA. Exit to the rear side. On the other hand, in a situation where the distribution mechanism 601 takes a non-guided posture and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, the closing operation mechanism 2001 closes the passage leading from the specific passage TA to the non-specific area.

Inside the distribution mechanism 601, in the situation where the closing operation mechanism 2001 closes the passage leading from the specific passage TA to the non-specific area, only one game ball is upstream of the closing operation mechanism 2001 (right side in FIG. 41). Is provided with a holding area 2002 that can be held. The holding area 2002 is located below the sorting mechanism 601 so that when the sorting mechanism 601 takes the guiding posture and the gaming ball enters the sorting mechanism 601, the gaming ball enters with priority over the V region side. It is located on the side.

On the right side where the V area is located with respect to the holding area 2002, a holding plate portion 2003 that projects upward and separates the holding area 2002 and the V area corresponding to the downstream side of the specific passage TA is provided. The game ball once entering the holding area 2002 is restricted to move to the right side by the holding plate portion 2003, and is set to a height that cannot advance to the V area (for example, a height up to a position close to the center of the game ball). ing.

In a period during which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the specific passage TA, as shown in FIG. 41(B), the game ball that first enters the specific passage TA enters the holding area 2002. .. When the following game ball enters the specific passage TA in the situation where the game ball is held in the holding area 2002, as shown in FIG. 41(C), it collides with the game ball (holding ball) held in the holding area 2002. Then, the game ball is guided to the V area side by the holding ball.

When the switching solenoid 465 is turned off after the admissible period has elapsed, the entrance to the specific passage TA is blocked by the distribution mechanism 601 as shown in FIG. 41(D). Thereby, the game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening 433A is guided to the non-specific passage TA. Further, when the switching solenoid 465 is turned off, the closing operation mechanism 2001 retreats to the rear side, and the holding ball held in the holding area 2002 is guided to the non-specific passage TA.

Here, the number of game balls guided to the specific passage TA side in the specific round by the operation of the distribution mechanism 601 is set to at least two or more balls because one ball is consumed by the reserved balls. It is preferable that a plurality of game balls be set to be guided to the specific passage TA side. The number of game balls guided to the specific passage TA can be adjusted by the length of time that the switching solenoid 465 is on in the specific round. Further, the number of holding balls for guiding the game balls to the specific passage TA side may be set to another number of two balls or more, and for example, the holding area 2002 is set to a depth at which the two game balls are held. You may set it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, only when the plurality of game balls are guided to the specific passage TA side by the distribution mechanism 601 in the specific round, the specific passage TA provided with the V region is played. The ball can be capable of traveling. Therefore, in the special game state of the 16R jackpot (V non-win), the game ball is caught in the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 of the upper jackpot device 434 in the fifth round, and the game ball is moved downward before the end of the fifth round. Even if the game ball enters the specific passage TA side due to an accidental event such as flowing down, it is possible not to reach the V area. Therefore, in the special game state of the 16R jackpot (V non-win), the probability that the game ball enters the V area can be made close to zero, and the maker unfairly sets the profit that the player cannot obtain. It is possible to avoid the situation of getting it.

The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

(1) In the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the lottery reach generation unit game is assigned to the unit game after the confirmed reach generation unit game has been described, but the unit game before the confirmed reach generation unit game A lottery reach generation unit game can be assigned to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, regarding each transition pattern, a fixed reach occurrence unit game is assigned to one unit game, and a lottery reach occurrence unit game is assigned to one unit game. As described above, the fixed reach occurrence unit game or the lottery reach occurrence unit game can be allocated to the unit games of a plurality of times. In the case of this configuration, if the reach display of the number of times exceeding the total number of the number of unit games assigned to the fixed reach occurrence unit game and the number of unit games assigned to the lottery reach occurrence unit game occurs, It is confirmed that it will be a big hit. In addition, when a fixed reach occurrence unit game is assigned to one or more unit games and a lottery reach occurrence unit game is assigned to one or more unit games, the order of those unit games is appropriately changed. be able to.

Further, in the above pachinko machine 100, the number of unit games to which the fixed reach generation unit game is allocated and the number of unit games to which the lottery reach generation unit game is allocated are the same in each transition pattern. Although the case has been described, the number of times they are allocated may be different.

Further, in the above pachinko machine 100, the configuration including both the unit game assigned to the fixed reach generation unit game and the unit game assigned to the lottery reach generation unit game has been described, but only one of them is included. It can also be configured.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, the configuration for controlling the generation mode of the reach display of the decorative pattern based on the transition pattern has been described, but another predetermined display related to the change of the decorative pattern, for example, one of the decorative patterns. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a stop mode when stopping a part, a character that appears with a change in a decorative pattern, and a generation mode of an effect that occurs with a change in a decorative pattern are controlled.

Further, in the above pachinko machine 100, the configuration that controls the occurrence mode of the reach display of the decorative pattern based on the transition pattern has been described, but the configuration that controls the occurrence mode of the fluctuation of the fluctuation time longer than the predetermined time You can also do it.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration for controlling the occurrence mode of the reach display in the probability variation game state in which the maximum continuous unit game number is determined based on the transition pattern has been described, but the maximum continuous unit game number is limited. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the occurrence mode of the reach display in the certain probability variation game state is controlled based on the transition pattern.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration has been described in which the occurrence mode of the reach display in the probability variation game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, is controlled based on the transition pattern. However, the reach display occurs in the normal game state. Aspects can also be controlled based on transition patterns.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100 described above, in the conversion value replacement determination, by adding the same number of values as the number of values included in the range on the maximum value side to the conversion value, the two separated ranges are set to one. We have explained the case where it is integrated into a continuous range on the minimum value side and it is determined collectively whether or not to replace the conversion value, but the same number of values as the number of values included in the range on the minimum value side is converted value. It is possible to integrate the two separated ranges into one continuous range on the maximum value side and collectively determine whether or not to replace the conversion value.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, the case where the set of values not adopted as the stop symbol identification value is the range of continuous values including the minimum value and the range of continuous values including the maximum value has been described. The set of values not adopted as the symbol identification value may be a value in a range that does not include the minimum value or the maximum value. Further, the case where the set of values not adopted as the stop symbol identification value is distributed to the two separated ranges has been described, but the set of values not adopted as the stop symbol identification value is one continuous range or three. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the particles are dispersed in the above-described separated range.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, the operation used for generating the conversion value of the symbol identification value is a combination of the zero padding left bit shift operation and the exclusive OR operation, but other basic logic It can be a combination of operations. As basic logical operations, bit inversion operation, zero padded left bit shift operation, 1 padded left bit shift operation, 0 padded right bit shift operation, 1 padded right bit shift operation, left bit rotation operation, right bit rotation operation, logical sum The arithmetic operation, the logical product operation, and the exclusive logical sum operation are included. Further, in the above, the case where the operation used to generate the converted value of the symbol identification value is the combination of only the basic logical operation has been described, but the operation including the operation different from the basic logical operation such as the four arithmetic operations should be performed. Can also

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the case where the calculation used to generate the converted value of the symbol identification value is performed before the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been described, but the predetermined calculation is performed. It can be configured to be performed during the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, it may be configured to be performed when the variable display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended. In addition, when the calculation used to generate the conversion value of the symbol identification value is significantly more complicated than the calculation of the present embodiment or includes a calculation other than the logical calculation, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol If you are concerned about the delay of the start of the change and the delay of the transition from the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to the stop symbol display, do it during the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is preferred.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, after the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter is converted into the symbol identification value, the conversion value is generated by a predetermined calculation based on the symbol identification value. For example, the possible value of the big hit symbol random number counter may be restricted to "250" or less, and the conversion value may be generated by a predetermined calculation based on the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, the case where the possible range of the symbol identification value and the stop symbol identification value is represented by the same number of bits as the basic operation bit number in the main control board 920 has been described. It may be configured to be expressed by a number.

In addition, in the above, a case has been described in which the pattern of transitions that definitely or selectively generate loser reach in the probability variation game state is not easily guessed by the player, and the playability in the probability variation game state is improved. However, the number of consecutive rounds in the special game state is not easily guessed, and the game playability in the special game state is improved, and the number of continuous unit games in the specific game state (probability variation game state or time saving game state) is set. It can be applied to a configuration that improves the game playability in a specific game state by not being easily guessed.

(3) In the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the start condition is satisfied and the unit game is executed by the start winning to any one of the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B and the right starting winning device 432. However, the starting condition for generating the right of the unit game is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, and may be another configuration. For example, the number of devices that satisfy the starting condition may be different, the satisfaction of the starting condition may be determined by passing through the ball entering portion as the starting device, or the entering ball portion provided inside the winning device may be used. The starting condition may be satisfied when a game ball enters.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, as the establishment of the specific game start condition for starting the specific game state corresponding to the probability variation game state according to each transition pattern, the jackpot win in the unit game based on the start prize, and each based on the start prize. The case where the three conditions of the determination of the stop symbol identification value corresponding to the transition pattern and the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA (V winning) in the special game state executed by the jackpot winning are satisfied have been described. The establishment of the specific game start condition is not limited to the above condition, and other conditions may be adopted such as the V prize is omitted and the lottery for transition to the probability variation game state is determined by the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter when the jackpot is won. .. Also, the determination of the stop symbol identification value as the specific game start condition is based on the value of a counter different from the winning random number counter used for jackpot winning, but the value of the winning random number counter corresponds to the type of transition pattern The winning value may be set, and the stop symbol identification value may be determined in association with the value of the winning random number counter.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the stop symbol identification value corresponding to the probability variation game state by each transition pattern is displayed by the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol. However, instead of this or in addition to this, the decorative symbol display device 479 may display information corresponding to the stop symbol identification value. For example, during the special game state, the decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured to display the number of probability changing states B and C by the establishment of a predetermined display condition, and the number of remaining unit games as the number of probability changing state C is 50 times or more. When a transition pattern corresponding to a probability variation game state with a large benefit such as is selected, information in characters such as "a chance has arrived" may be displayed during the special game state, and the start number of the probability variation state D may be " It may be displayed by information including a number indicating the number of times the privilege is granted, such as “50 times or more”, or a specific remaining unit game number at which the probability variation state D is started may be displayed as it is.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, only the probability variation states D and E of the probability variation states A to E set the small hit probability to a high probability to generate a probability variation game state in which a bonus is given to the player. The method of varying the contents of the benefits given to the player is not limited to the above method, and the gaming state in which the small hit probability is high probability continues for a certain period from the start of the probability variation gaming state The contents of the privilege given to the player may be changed by changing the stop symbol identification value. In addition, it is not always necessary to change the number of times that the small hit probability as the content of the privilege to be granted becomes high probability, the lengths of the probability variation states D and E are constant (for example, 10 times), and only the start timing is different. You can let me. Even in this case, it is possible to make a difference in the privilege obtained depending on whether or not the game state is shifted by the big hit, so that the game can be diversified.

Further, in the above pachinko machine 100, the length of the period of the probability variation game state is a fixed number of times that the unit game is executed 100 times unless the big hit is won, but the number of times may be changed. In this case, the variable display of the unit game by the first special symbol by the left-handed game technique and the variable display of the unit game by the second special symbol by the right-handed game technique are simultaneously executed in parallel, and one of the variable displays is won. If the other variation display is stopped, the ultra-long variation time (for example, 1 hour) longer than the variation time of long time 2 is selected as the unit game of the variation time of long time 1 of the probability variation state C in the probability variation game state. As a setting, a privilege is given from a unit game (for example, a unit game in the probability variation state B) before the ultralong variable time is selected (for example, a small hit probability is set to a high probability). Is also good. In this case, since the execution timing of the probability variation state C changes due to the control of the transition pattern, the size of the privilege granted according to the transition pattern can be different, and the transition pattern is a common pattern. However, if the ultra-long variation time is selected in the probability variation state C, the game cannot be continued by the right-handing method thereafter, so that the bonus grant by the small hit continuous winning can be terminated halfway with a preset probability. it can. That is, it is possible to set the ending time of the game state in which the privilege in which the small hit probability has become a high probability is given a predetermined number of times by controlling the variation time based on the transition pattern.

Here, as the ultra-long fluctuation time, it is not always necessary to set the fluctuation time over 1 hour or more, and it is sufficient if it is set to a time sufficiently longer than the maximum fluctuation time that can be set in the normal gaming state. The time is preferably set to approximately twice the time or more, and more preferably set to approximately three times or more.

Further, as a plurality of transition patterns, the start count of the probability variation state D is the same, and another game state in which the ultra-long variation time is set in the middle of the probability variation state D is set at a different timing from the start of the probability variation state D. In this case, even if the number of unit games in which the privilege is granted to the player in the probability variation state D is set to the same number, the content of the privilege granted to the player is set. It can be substantially different.

Further, as at least one of the transition patterns, in the unit game in the probability variation state D, the ultra-long variation time may be selected with a lower probability (for example, 1/1000) than the jackpot winning. In this case, Since the number of consecutive small hits can be made different even with the same transition pattern, it is possible to further increase the number of modes in which a privilege is given and realize various game characteristics.

In the pachinko machine 100, when the probability variation game state is selected in the transition pattern in which the probability variation state D has a slow start number in the middle of the probability variation game state, and the probability variation game state is not selected We explained the configuration in which the gaming state can be selected by a transition pattern with fewer bonuses to be given, but if there is a big jackpot win during the probability variation game state, the bonus that is given more reliably than if there was no jackpot win It may be configured to be large. For example, the maximum value of the number of balls acquired in the probability changing state D may be set to be smaller than the minimum value of the number of balls acquired in the jackpot winning. As the minimum value of the number of balls to be obtained by jackpot winning, the number of balls to be acquired in the special game state and the number of balls to be obtained in the probability variation game state according to the transition pattern in which the number of unit games in the probability variation state D is set to the minimum number. The number of balls acquired is summed up.

In the pachinko machine 100, the example in which the bonus is given to the player in the probability variation game state after the special game state has been described, but the bonus is not given to the player in the special game state and the probability variation game is given. The privilege may be granted only in the state. In addition, it is not always necessary to make the gaming state in which the bonus is given to the player by the small hit winning is the probability changing gaming state, the normal gaming state and the big hit winning probability are the same, and the small hit winning probability is a gaming state in which a high period is set. May be generated corresponding to the stop symbol identification value. Also, for the time saving state, it is not always necessary to add the time saving state in the probability variation game state, and a winning device without a mechanism for changing the entry probability may be provided as the right start winning device 432, or a unit game holding function. It is not always necessary, for example, the unit game of the second special symbol cannot be held, and the right of the next unit game can be established only when the starting winning occurs after the unit game being executed is finished. good.

In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the small hit probability is set to a high probability for a certain gaming state (probability variation state D, E) of the probability variation game state controlled by the transition pattern, and a bonus is given to the player. Although the privilege-giving game state is generated, the privilege-giving game state is not limited to the winning probability, and the variable time may be set by controlling the transition pattern depending on the number of times the unit game is executed. In the case of winning the small hit, the small hit privilege such as the length of the possible entering period of the game ball into the large winning device 433 and the number of prizes until the game moves to the entry prohibited posture may be changed. Even if it is a unit game that wins a small hit, if the variation time of the special symbol is long, the number of game balls passing near the lower large prize winning device 433 increases during the variation display of the special symbol, so variation The longer the time, the more the number of balls that are not awarded and the number of balls that can be acquired as a privilege can be reduced. In addition, as the variation time in the privilege granting game state, unless the game ball is continuously fired from the start of the variation display, the game ball does not catch up with the transition to the entry allowable posture of the lower large prize winning apparatus 433, and the number of balls to be acquired decreases. It is preferable that the unit game is set, and it is preferable that the variation time is set to be shorter than the average time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival of the game ball at the lower-large prize winning device 433. Thereby, in the privilege granting game state, it is only necessary to set a period in which a unit game having a long entry period of the large-award winning device 433 is continuously generated a plurality of times by the small hit prize and the length of the varying time is made different, It is possible to efficiently award the player at a predetermined timing during the probability variation game state.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the small hit is set as the lottery result of the unit game relating to the second special symbol has been described, but the small hit is also made as the lottery result of the unit game relating to the first special symbol. May be set, and the small hit prize may be controlled under the same lottery condition. However, by clarifying the game nature to which the privilege is granted by the right-handed game technique, the right-handed game technique is the right-handed game technique when the small hit is won in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is preferably larger than the left-handed game technique, for example, the variation time at the time of a small hit in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol or the entrance to the entrance of the lower big prize device 433. The permissible time may be different, and the unit game related to the second special symbol may be set to have a longer entry permissible time in one winning, or the unit game related to the second special symbol may be set once. The variation time of the special symbol may be set to be short.

In the pachinko machine 100, the variation time of the probability variation state D is set to be the same as a part of the variation time of the probability variation state A or the probability variation state C, but the variation time of the probability variation state D in other states. It may be set to be a shorter variation time than the variation time, which makes it easier for the player to understand that the gaming state to which the bonus is given by the continuous winning of the small hit in the probability variation gaming state is different from other gaming states. Can be shown.

In the pachinko machine 100 described above, an example in which both the variation time and the small hit condition are varied in accordance with the transition pattern as the gaming state during the probability variation gaming state after the special gaming state has been described. Only one of the time and the small hit winning probability may be changed. For example, even if the selection condition of the variation time in the probability variation gaming state is set to a constant, the small hit probability and the small hit bonus of the unit game in the probability variation gaming state are changed according to the transition pattern in accordance with the stop symbol identification value. In this case, it is possible to provide the player with the playability in which the content of the privilege given to the player is changed in the probability variation game state. Further, even if the small hit condition in the probability variation gaming state is set to be constant, if the variation time in the probability variation gaming state is changed corresponding to the stopped symbol identification value in accordance with the transition pattern, in the probability variation gaming state By executing the preceding effect, it is possible to provide the player with a playability in which the content of the formal privilege is changed.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which a plurality of types of pre-determination pre-production and post-determination pre-production are executed as the pre-production has been described. May be carried out, or neither of them may be carried out. Further, as the preceding effect, only a part of the above-described plural kinds of preceding effects may be performed.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the upper prize winning device 434, the lower prize winning device 433, and the distribution mechanism 601 allow a certain amount of entry in a round in which the game ball moves in a different direction. After taking the posture or the guiding posture, it is assumed that the posture is restored to the original posture when the movement end condition is satisfied, but it is not always necessary to operate in a movement pattern that takes a constant posture in each round, and At least in part, it operates intermittently or over a plurality of times in a motion pattern that takes an entry-allowed posture or a guided posture, and maintains the original posture before the start of the movement when the movement end condition is satisfied. Cases may be included.

For example, in the round immediately before the specific round (fifth round in the above-described embodiment), the operation of the upper prize winning apparatus 434, which has made it impossible to flow the game ball to the specific passage TA side, is intermittently allowed to enter, and fixed. It is configured to take a prohibition posture temporarily at regular intervals or irregularly, and the game balls flow down in front of the upper special winning opening 434A at a fixed rate (for example, 1 ball out of 30 balls) and are specified. You may make it generate|occur|produce the special game state which advances to the passage TA side. In this case, in the fifth round, it is possible to generate a difficult flow-down period in which the game ball does not flow down to the specific passage TA side, but has a certain probability of flowing down, instead of the non-flow-down period. Even in a specific round in the special game state of "16R jackpot (V non-win)" via a short interval, a game ball enters the specific passage TA with a small probability (for example, about 15%), and a V win can be generated. Amusement can be added.

In addition, the operation of the distribution mechanism 601 that allows the game balls to flow down to the specific passage TA in the specific round (sixth round in the above-described embodiment) intermittently takes a guiding posture, and at regular intervals or irregularly. It is configured to temporarily take a non-guided posture, and a special game state in which the game balls progress toward the non-specific passage TB side instead of the specific passage TA at a certain ratio (for example, one in ten balls) It may be allowed to. In this case, it is possible to add a game feature in which the game ball does not accidentally enter the specific passage TA in the enterable period in the sixth round of the special game state of "16R jackpot (V winnings)", and the enterable period As 100%, the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, and with a high probability (for example, approximately 95%), the game ball enters the specific passage TA, and it is possible to add a gaming property in which a V prize can be generated.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, 100% or 0% depending on the type of special game state (specifically, "16R jackpot (V prize)" and "16R jackpot (V non-prize)". Although the case where the game ball enters the specific passage TA with the probability has been described, a special game in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA with another probability in place of or in addition to at least one of the probabilities. For example, a special game state in which the enterable period during which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA is set to be approximately the same as the firing time interval of the game ball is generated, and the probability is about 70%. It may be configured to include a special game state in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA.The length of the interval time immediately before the specific round, and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA from the special winning device 433 in the specific round. It is possible to set the special game state in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA with various probabilities by changing the ratio with the length of the enterable formation period forming the state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, when the distribution mechanism 601 enters the specific passage TA, there is a 100% probability that the player always wins the V prize. However, the game ball entering the specific passage TA is a game ball. With a certain probability (for example, 1/3), the player enters a specific area in the specific passage TA to generate a V prize, and only when the V prize occurs, a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, , Probability variation game state) may occur.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the game ball enters the specific passage TA in a special game state having a long interval time as a standby time immediately before a specific round among a plurality of types of special game states having different standby times only. Although the configuration has been described, the probability of the game ball entering the specific passage TA may be higher in the special game state in which the waiting time is short immediately before the specific round. For example, as the interval time, the opening time elapses after the combination operation device 435 is activated, and then the second round is started via the first round of a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). It may be configured to generate a plurality of special game states in which the interval times of the first round and the second round are different, and the game ball that has passed through the combination operation device 435 on the downstream side of the combination operation device 435 enters the specific passage TA. The second round is started so as to include the timing to generate the enterable formation period, and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, or it can enter slightly later than the timing when the game ball enters. It is also possible to generate a special game state in which a formation period is generated and a game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA, and the probability of the game ball entering the specific passage TA is different. Further, when the game ball that has passed through the combination actuating device 435 is configured to enter the specific passage TA, the probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA is necessarily changed depending on a plurality of special game states having different interval times. There is no need to do so, for example, a plurality of special game states with different opening times may be generated, and the probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA may be different with the subsequent first round as the specific round.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the case where all the game balls that have passed through the rightward flow path KR may proceed to the entrance side of the specific passage TA has been described, but the distribution mechanism 601 in the rightward flow path KR is described. A control mechanism that controls the flow down of the game balls so that the game balls flow down only at a fixed rate on the distribution mechanism 601 side may be provided on the upstream side. For example, a seesaw-type structure in which the downward direction is switched for each ball is provided upstream of the distribution mechanism 601 in a flow path in which the specific passage TA is located on the downstream side and a flow path in which the specific passage TA is not located on the downstream side. One or a plurality may be provided on the side, and the game ball may not proceed to the specific passage TA side only at a time interval that is a multiple of the firing time interval. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls heading to the specific passage TA in a situation where an enterable formation period in which the game balls can enter the specific passage TA is generated. Settings and the like can be easily performed.

In the pachinko machine 100, a special game state of "16R jackpot (V prize)" and "16R jackpot (V non-prize)" is generated as a plurality of types of special game states that differ only in standby time. However, it is not always necessary to change the probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA depending on the special game state in which only the waiting time is different, and it is necessary to change the allowable number of entrances in at least some rounds, other than the waiting time. The probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA may be changed depending on the special game state in which other conditions are different. Even in this case, it is possible to simplify the control in the special game state by setting the same control in some rounds in a plurality of special game states in which the probability of the game ball entering the specific passage TA is different. Is preferable.

In the pachinko machine 100, the function of changing the probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA depending on a plurality of types of special game states having different standby times and the flow-down route leading to the specific passage TA at the time of power failure are flowing down. A ball holding function during a power failure that keeps the game ball within a predetermined range, and swings before and after the timing when the game ball reaches the sorting mechanism 601 that is in the enterable state in a specific round. The case of having a function of performing control for continuing the shooting of the game ball so that the minute mechanism 601 can be reached has been described, but a game machine that does not have at least one of these functions may be used. For example, a plurality of types of special game states with different interval times do not occur such that the probability of a game ball entering the specific passage TA is different, and the game ball is in the specific passage TA by the operation control of the distribution mechanism 601 other than the interval time. The configurations may be different in the probability of entering. Even in such a case, the game state transition control determined before the power failure can be restored at the time of power recovery by the ball holding function during a power failure, and the specific passage TA can be set by setting the round end condition before the specific round. In the situation where the game ball can enter, it is preferable that the shooting operation can be prompted so that the game ball can easily enter the specific passage TA.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, when the lottery related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is won, the type of special symbol corresponding to the lottery result (for example, the symbol identification value or the stop symbol identification value) According to, the type of special game state is fixed, with a probability set for each special symbol type, a special game state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, and a special game state in which it cannot enter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the condition, which of the special game states in which whether or not the game ball can enter the specific passage TA is different is generated. It may be decided. For example, even if the symbol identification value as the type of the special symbol is the same, the probability of occurrence of the special game state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA may be changed corresponding to the game state in which the winning has occurred. , For example, if the lottery related to the second special symbol is won, and the symbol identification value is “0”, it is changed at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the variable display is started) in the game won in the lottery. A special game state in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA with a probability of 100% occurs in the game state, and a special game in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA with a probability of 0% in a time saving game state. The main control board 920 may control to generate a state (that is, a special game state in which the game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA). In this case, with respect to a plurality of symbol identification values, whether or not the game ball can enter the specific passage TA with respect to the game state at a predetermined timing may be set differently, and with a probability according to the game state. The gaming machine can generate a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For example, in the winning of the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state occurs with a probability of 100%, and in the winning of the second special symbol in the time saving gaming state, the probability variation gaming state occurs with a probability of 80%. The generation control of these gaming states can be easily generated by special gaming states with different interval times.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the distribution mechanism 601 is provided on the downstream side inside the lower big prize device 433 has been described, but both the lower big prize device 433 and the distribution mechanism 601 are not necessarily provided. The special winning device 433 is omitted, only the distribution mechanism 601 operates in the specific round, and the distribution mechanism 601 allows the specific passage TA and non-specific passages (non-specific passage TB and exhaust passage). A game ball may be distributed to the exit).

(5) In the gaming machine according to the second embodiment described above, the configuration in which the movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 exit from the flow path of the game ball in a situation where a power failure occurs has been described. The movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 maintain the state of projecting in the downflow path of the game ball to exert a ball holding function and an improper ingress suppression function during a power failure, and keep the game ball flowing down the downflow path leading to the specific passage TA constant. The configuration may be such that it is held within the range. In this case, the movable projecting piece S5 located on the most downstream side is provided inside the lower large prize winning device 1433, and the game ball that was supposed to enter the specific passage TA surely moves to the specific passage TA. It is preferable because it can be held on the flow-down path that leads to it.

Further, the processing of S2111 of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment described above may be omitted and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 may not be turned off. During the period when the pause flag is set, the game ball does not flow down the rightward flow path KR, so there is no game ball entering the upper special winning opening 434A, and the player is set by the pause flag. This is because the number of game balls that can be acquired does not increase in the special game state.

Further, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, in a part of the special game state, when there is no downflow of the game ball for a certain period of time on the right downflow route KR by the right hit detection switch 603, the abnormal launch state is detected. Thus, the configuration in which the temporary stop flag is set and the special game state is temporarily stopped has been described, but the temporary stop flag may be set in place of, or in addition to, another condition. For example, whether or not the player is performing a firing operation is detected by the state of the contact sensor 254 of the firing operation device 250, and the pause flag is set under at least one of the conditions that the firing operation is being performed. In this case, the abnormal firing state is detected on condition that the player intentionally executes the firing operation, and it is the responsibility of the player if the player does not intentionally perform the firing operation. It is possible to add a game property in which a special game state progresses.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to any of the first and third embodiments, at least any one of the movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 according to the second embodiment is connected to the rightward flow path KR or the large winning a prize device 433, 2433. It may be provided inside.

(6) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which once a big hit occurs, the expected big hit value is increased until a big hit state including the big hit occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice or three times). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine which is in a special game state on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the big hit symbol is displayed. It may also be implemented in an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various kinds of game machines such as an arrangement ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball may be implemented. Further, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot of a type in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
The features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing problems and effects as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in brackets or the like. The meanings and examples of the terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of the terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Characteristic 10>
A predetermined lottery (for example, first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) lottery means (for example, winning random number counter and jackpot initial value random number counter),
Display means for displaying a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the combination in accordance with the result of the predetermined lottery,
Based on the winning in the predetermined lottery, game state control means for changing the game state to a specific game state (for example, probability variation game state),
A gaming machine including
A specific display in which a part of the plurality of symbols is stopped in a predetermined combination as a mode of variable display of the plurality of symbols executed in the display means and a mode in which the predetermined lottery is not won (Eg, reach display), including a variable display of a specific loss mode in which the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination according to the loss,
Selection unit for selecting a control pattern (for example, a transition pattern) for controlling the execution of the variable display according to the specific loss mode for each unit game in the specific game state from a plurality of control patterns before entering the specific game state (Eg, jackpot symbol random number counter and jackpot symbol initial value random number counter),
Two or more control patterns (for example, a transition pattern) in which the permissible times of the permissible unit game (for example, the fixed reach generation unit game and the lottery reach generation unit game) corresponding to the unit game that allows the variation display in the specific loss mode are different. Including a plurality of control patterns (for example, 120 types of transition patterns) such that the allowable number of permissible unit games is a predetermined number (for example, two times) or less, and the permissible number of permissible unit games In a different unit game, the gaming machine is controlled so as to prohibit the variable display in the specific losing mode.

In the conventional gaming machine, when the big hit is won in the big hit lottery, it is known that the special game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state over a predetermined number of unit games through a special game state. ing. In such a gaming machine, in the specific game state, in the unit game that is not won in the big hit, the variation mode of the symbol is determined by the lottery of the variation mode performed for each unit game, and the lost symbol is displayed through the reach display. The result of the big hit lottery is notified in a manner such that the lost symbol is displayed without passing through the reach display or the reach display. In the unit game that wins the big hit, the lottery result is notified in a mode in which the big hit symbol is displayed through the reach display.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in each unit game in the specific gaming state, a mode involving a reach display with a certain probability is selected by lottery when a big hit is not won. Therefore, the player may be dissatisfied in a situation in which the win is not won even if the reach display is repeatedly generated during the specific game state, and there is room for improvement in the game performance in the specific game state.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the characteristic 10, it is possible to improve the playability in the specific gaming state.

That is, in each control pattern, the allowable number of times that the variable display in the specific deviation mode is allowed is limited to a predetermined number or less, so that if the number of the specific displays exceeds the allowable number of times in the specific game state, the predetermined number of times is given. The winning in the lottery is confirmed. Therefore, even if the game progresses without winning the predetermined lottery in the specific game state, the number of times the specific display is executed increases toward the allowable number of times, so that the winning of the predetermined lottery as the game progresses. Expectation can be amplified. As a result, the playability in the specific game state can be further improved.

Further, since the specific display does not occur repeatedly when the specific lottery is not won, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unsatisfied by not winning the prize even if the specific display is repeatedly generated. Further, similarly to the case where the specific display generation lottery is performed for each unit game, it is possible to vary the unit game in which the specific display occurs during the specific game state.

<Characteristic 11>
In the game machine according to feature 10,
As the permissible unit game, including a fixed unit game (for example, a fixed reach occurrence unit game) that performs a variable display in the specific loss mode,
In each of the plurality of control patterns, at least one unit game in the specific game state is assigned to the fixed unit game.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 11, in the specific game state, a specific display that can be expected to win in a predetermined lottery is executed at least once, and it is determined whether or not a variable display in a specific lost manner is performed in each allowable unit. You can expect winning in a predetermined lottery, such as when you decide by lottery in a game, or when you decide by lottery in each unit game whether or not to display variable display in a specific losing mode like a conventional gaming machine. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific display is not executed at all even if the special display is shifted to the specific game state.

<Characteristic 12>
In the gaming machine according to feature 10 or 11,
In all of the plurality of control patterns, the permissible unit game is not assigned to a predetermined number of unit games, the gaming machine.

If it is the gaming machine described in the feature 12, the specific display will not be executed in the predetermined number of unit games unless the player has won the predetermined lottery. Therefore, if the specific display is executed, the predetermined lottery is executed. It is possible to easily set a unit game in which it is confirmed that the player has won. In addition, it is possible to set a unit game in which an allowable unit game is not assigned according to a rule that the player can easily understand (for example, a doublet), and if a specific display occurs, whether or not it is a unit game for which winning is confirmed is determined. A game that is easy to understand can be realized.

<Characteristic 20>
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery (for example, a big hit symbol random number counter and a big hit symbol initial value random number counter), and display information generating means for generating display information (for example, a stop symbol identification value) based on the lottery result by the lottery means. (Stop symbol generation processing S1404), display means for displaying the display information (for example, special symbol display devices 471 and 472 relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol), and a game mode based on the lottery result ( For example, a gaming machine including a game mode determining means for determining a transition pattern in a probability variation game state),
The display information generating means generates a conversion value by a predetermined calculation (for example, a combination of a zero padded left bit shift calculation and an exclusive OR calculation) based on a value (for example, a symbol identification value) corresponding to the lottery result. And a replacement unit that replaces the conversion value with a predetermined replacement value when the conversion value generated by the conversion unit is a predetermined value.
The display information is generated without replacement by the replacement unit when the conversion value generated by the conversion unit is different from the predetermined value, and the conversion value generated by the conversion unit is the predetermined value. And the game machine is generated through the replacement by the replacement means.

In the conventional gaming machine, the result display of the predetermined lottery is diversified, and based on the result display, the mode of the game progress depending on the result of the predetermined lottery cannot be easily discriminated, and the predetermined lottery is performed. There is known a configuration that improves the playability in the game state after winning. For example, in the special game state transition lottery, it is not possible to easily determine which of a plurality of different types of jackpots with different profits has been won, and a profit from a low jackpot with a low profit during the special game state accompanying the jackpot. There is a configuration that improves the game performance by performing a promotion effect to a high jackpot.

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the mode of result display is determined according to the random number by referring to the table showing the correspondence between the random numbers used in the predetermined lottery and the mode of result display. However, when the result display mode is determined based on the table, as the result display mode is increased, the data capacity for forming the table also increases, and regarding the diversification of the display mode of the predetermined lottery result. There was room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 20, it is possible to suitably diversify the display mode of the predetermined lottery result, and improve the playability in the game after winning the predetermined lottery.

That is, in the display means, not based on the lottery result itself having a high relevance to the game mode, but based on the display information (conversion value or replacement value) generated by a predetermined calculation based on the lottery result and the relevance is weakened. The lottery result is displayed. Therefore, it becomes difficult for some players to infer the game mode based on the lottery result from the display on the display means. As a result, the playability in the game state set based on the lottery result is improved. In addition, when the display information is generated based on a table showing the correspondence between the lottery result and the display information, the display information is generated by a predetermined calculation based on the lottery result except for a part in the generation of the display information. Compared with, it is possible to easily generate various display information without significantly increasing the program capacity and the data capacity. Further, when the converted value is a value which is not desired to be used as the display information or a value which is desired to be used for other purposes, those values can be preferably excluded.

<Characteristic 21>
In the game machine according to feature 20,
The predetermined operation in the conversion means is a basic logical operation for generating a value including a bit array that is the same as an array of a predetermined bit range in the value from a value corresponding to the lottery result in a specific bit range, A game machine characterized by being a combination of a basic logic calculation of a value generated by calculation and a value corresponding to the lottery result.

With the configuration described in the feature 21, the conversion means is composed of only basic logical operations, so that the conversion means is different from the case of including operations different from basic logical operations such as general four arithmetic operations. The calculation in can be performed at high speed. Further, since the operation in the converting means does not include the operation of exchanging the bit array in the predetermined bit range, the operation can be performed at a higher speed than the case of performing the operation of exchanging the bit array in the predetermined bit range. As a result, the operation of the conversion means can be completed in one interrupt of the timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined interval, so that the delay of the next interrupt can be suppressed, and the interrupts can be distributed and executed in a plurality of interrupts. The program can be simplified as compared to the case where the game progress is smoothly controlled.

<Characteristic 22>
In the gaming machine according to feature 20 or 21,
The predetermined value includes a minimum value represented by a plurality of bits constituting the display information, a value in a range of a predetermined minimum value continuous from the minimum value, and a maximum value represented by the plurality of bits. Including, including the value of the range of a predetermined maximum value continuous to the maximum value,
The display means includes a display body corresponding to each bit of the plurality of bits, and a display manner is determined according to a value of each bit, and all the display bodies have the same display manner. The lottery result is displayed in a display form different from a predetermined display form including.

With the gaming machine described in the feature 22, if the converted value is a value that is not desired to be used as display information or a value that is desired to be used for another purpose, those values can be easily excluded.

<Characteristic 23>
In the gaming machine described in feature 22,
The display information is composed of the same or a multiple number of bits as the basic operation bit number,
The replacing means adds or subtracts a predetermined correction value to or from the converted value generated by the converting means to obtain a continuous value of a predetermined minimum value side range value and a predetermined maximum value side range value. The game machine is characterized in that it is determined whether or not to convert the conversion value generated by the conversion means to the predetermined replacement value based on the continuous value.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 23, the value that is not desired to be used as the display information or the value that is desired to be used for other purposes is dispersed into the minimum value side range including the minimum value and the maximum value side range including the maximum value. However, the ranges can be integrated into one continuous range by addition and subtraction of predetermined values. Therefore, it is possible to collectively determine whether or not the conversion value is replaced with the predetermined replacement value, and the control process is simplified.

<Characteristic 24>
In the gaming machine according to feature 22 or 23,
The replacement means adds a conversion value generated by the conversion means and a value corresponding to the number of values included in the predetermined maximum value side range based on the addition operation of the plurality of bits to obtain a determination value. If the determination value is less than the sum of the number of values included in the predetermined minimum value side range and the number of values included in the predetermined maximum value side range, the determination value is generated. A game machine characterized by replacing with a replacement value according to the determination value and setting the replacement value as the display information.

With the gaming machine described in the feature 24, the minimum value side range including the minimum value and the maximum value side range including the maximum value can be integrated into a continuous range including the minimum value.

<Characteristic 25>
In the gaming machine according to feature 22 or 23,
The replacement unit subtracts a value corresponding to the number of values included in the predetermined minimum value side range from the conversion value generated by the conversion unit to generate a determination value, and the determination value is the maximum value. If the value exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the added value of the number of values included in the predetermined minimum value side range and the number of values included in the predetermined maximum value side range, A game machine characterized by replacing with a replacement value according to the determination value and setting the replacement value as the display information.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 25, the minimum value side range including the minimum value and the maximum value side range including the maximum value can be integrated into a continuous range including the maximum value.

<Characteristic 30>
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (winning determination processing S1403 of the main control board 920),
Judgment information display means (special symbol display devices 471, 472) for displaying information corresponding to the judgment result of the judgment means,
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific game start condition is satisfied, a combination of a plurality of unit games executed based on the satisfaction of a plurality of start conditions gives a player more than a normal game state. A game machine provided with a specific game state control means (each process for controlling the probability variation game state of the main control board 920) for generating an advantageous specific game state (probability variation game state),
The specific game state control means is for generating a plurality of types of specific game states in which at least one of the content of the privilege to be given to the player and the giving time is different.
The determination means determines whether or not a specific game start condition set corresponding to a plurality of types of specific game states is satisfied,
The determination information display means displays information corresponding to a specific game state in which control is started by the specific game state control means in a unit game based on a start condition in which the specific game start condition is satisfied,
Before the specific game state is started, which of a plurality of types of specific game states is to be started is selected, and information corresponding to the specific game state to be executed is displayed by the determination information display means. And the gaming machine.

In a conventional gaming machine, a game ball enters the starting opening as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by a lottery based on that entry, it becomes a special game state, and in the special game state a large number of game balls can be won in the winning opening. The following configuration is known. Also, in this type of gaming machine, after entering the special gaming state, a probability variation gaming state in which the winning probability of a big hit is higher than in the normal gaming state, or a gaming state in which a gaming ball enters the starting opening more easily than the regular gaming state, etc. It is also known that a game is added to diversify the game (see, for example, JP-A-2005-074175).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous game state depending on the result of the lottery performed by entering the game ball into the starting opening, so that the game state shifts to the advantageous game state. There is a problem that the game tends to be uniform such that the lottery result for each time is emphasized. In addition, when a new advantageous game state is provided, there is a problem that fraud aiming at the advantageous game state may occur.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 30, the continuous game constituted by the establishment of the starting condition a plurality of times as the specific game state can be executed by a plurality of types of patterns in which the contents of the privilege or the grant timing are different at least. Information corresponding to the contents of the continuous game can be transmitted to the player or the manager of the game hall as necessary. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying game playability and suppressing fraudulent activity by a continuous game constituted by establishment of start conditions plural times.

<Characteristic 31>
In the gaming machine described in feature 30,
The specific game state control means, as the content of the unit game executed when the start condition is satisfied, setting conditions of the variable time (variable time), and a privilege to determine whether to give a privilege to the player Stores multiple control patterns with different conditions, at least part of the grant conditions (small hit probability) and the contents of the privilege (time to allow entry to the winning opening) when the privilege grant conditions are met Pattern storage means (ROM of the main control board 920) for
A gaming machine, wherein the specific game state is generated by controlling the unit game with a control pattern corresponding to the number of executions of the unit game from the start to the end of the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 31, it is possible to set the content and the time when the privilege is given in advance before the specific game state is started, and to show the information corresponding to the content to the player in advance. Expectation of new amusement in which a privilege is awarded across multiple unit games compared to the amusement in which a privilege is simply awarded by winning one unit game, and the award of the benefit at an early stage It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be combined with the effects that are caused. Further, by applying a plurality of control patterns to each unit game, it is possible to control the specific game state configured by a plurality of unit games, so that it is easy to control the privilege given by the execution of the specific game state. be able to.

<Characteristic 32>
In the gaming machine according to feature 30 or 31,
A privilege granting information display means (holding information output setting process S1707) for displaying privilege granting time information corresponding to the privilege granting time to the player during the specific game state,
The specific game state control means is a privilege giving game state (probability change state D) in which a unit game in which a player is more likely to receive a bonus than a normal game state is consecutive multiple times, as compared with the privilege giving game state. After the execution of the game state (probability change states A to C) in which the unit game that is difficult to be given is consecutively executed a plurality of times, the specific game state is executed and the special game state is started, and the privilege is It is intended to generate a plurality of types of specific game states in which the number of executions of the unit game until the imparted game state is started,
The privilege granting information display means, before the privilege granting game state is started, and after the start condition of the unit game for starting the privilege granting game state is satisfied, at least a part of the privilege granting time information (confirmation) A game machine characterized by displaying a subsequent preceding effect display).

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 32, since a plurality of unit games before the privilege giving game state is started are executed in the specific game state, the period of the unit game of the plurality of times is given a privilege. It can be set as a period in which a game is executed while expecting a game state. Then, after the start condition of the unit game for starting the privilege granting game state is satisfied during the period, the privilege granting timing information is displayed by the privilege granting information display means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation where the grant of the privilege is invalidated due to the progress of the game after the privilege grant time information is displayed, or the setting of the start condition is difficult, so that the privilege is not granted. It is possible to display the privilege granting time information at a suitable timing that does not cause the inconvenience of forcing the player to spend a considerable amount of time and the game balls.

<Characteristic 33>
In the gaming machine according to any one of features 30 to 32,
The specific game state control means, if a predetermined privilege grant condition is satisfied during the specific game state, before the unit game of a predetermined number of times is executed, from the specific game state being executed to another game A game machine characterized by shifting to a state.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 33, a situation may occur in which the specific gaming state is necessarily ended without waiting for a predetermined number of unit games. Therefore, even if the information corresponding to the specific game state is displayed by the information display means, the progress of the game thereafter can be diversified, and the content of the specific game state is uniquely selected before the start thereof. Thus, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the subsequent game feels monotonous. In addition, when the privilege granting condition is satisfied, the game is transferred to another game state, so that another privilege is granted to the player even if at least a part of the benefits expected in the specific game state is not granted to the player. be able to. Therefore, the player's disappointment can be reduced as compared with the case where a part of the specific game state is simply lost.

<Characteristic 34>
In the gaming machine described in the features 30 to 33,
A ball entry section (lower major winning apparatus 433) to which a predetermined privilege is given to the player when the game ball is entered.
A state in which the game ball can easily enter the ball-entering part, and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball-entering part from the state where the ball can enter, or the game ball cannot enter the ball-entering part. And a ball entry state switching means (downward entry regulation solenoid 463) for generating a ball entry difficulty state corresponding to a different state,
The specific game control means controls the ball entry state switching means to preset the easy entry state in advance when a predetermined state continuous winning condition is established during the specific game state based on the establishment of the starting condition. Entry possible state generating means (special symbol related processing S1217) to be generated over a defined entry possible period,
And a variation time selection means (special symbol variation start time setting processing S1405) for selecting a variation display time to be executed before displaying information corresponding to establishment of the state continuous winning condition,
The variation time selection means determines the variation time of the unit game based on a plurality of types of variation time selection conditions in which the length of the variation time selected according to the number of unit games executed in the specific game state is different. A gaming machine characterized by selection.

According to the gaming machine described in the characteristic 34, by controlling the variable time, it is possible to control the ratio of the time during which the ball entry possible period occurs during the specific game state, and the game can be simplified while controlling the specific game state. Can be diverse. Also, in the specific game state, in the specific game state, by simply setting a period in which the variation time is short and the length of the variation time is different, for example, by continuously generating a unit game having a long entry possible period multiple times. It is possible to efficiently give a privilege to the player at a predetermined timing.

<Characteristic 40>
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (winning determination processing S1403 of the main control board 920),
Identification information display means (decorative pattern display device 479) for performing variable display when the starting condition is satisfied, and displaying information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means after the variable display.
Information display control means (main control board 920 and sub-control board 940) for controlling display contents of the identification information display means,
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific game start condition is satisfied, a combination of a plurality of unit games executed based on the satisfaction of a plurality of start conditions gives a player more than a normal game state. A game machine provided with a specific game state control means (each process for controlling the probability variation game state of the main control board 920) for generating an advantageous specific game state (probability variation game state),
1 is provided with a holding means (a function of holding the unit game of the main control board 920) capable of holding the execution of the unit game based on the satisfaction of the other starting conditions established during the execution of the unit game based on the satisfaction of the starting condition,
The specific game state control means is for generating a plurality of types of specific game states in which the award timing of the privilege given to the player is different,
Before the start condition of the unit game in which the award is executed, the information display control means sets information corresponding to the award time of the award in the specific game state where the control is started by the specific game state control means. A first grant time display means (process of holding information output setting process S1707 and S1908 and S1912) displayed on
In a mode different from the display by the first grant time display means, during the period when the starting condition of the unit game in which the grant of the privilege is executed is satisfied and the execution of the unit game is held by the holding means. A gaming machine comprising: a second grant time display means (processing of S1910 of the hold information output setting process S1707) for displaying information corresponding to the privilege grant time.

In a conventional gaming machine, a game ball enters the starting opening as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by a lottery based on that entry, it becomes a special game state, and in the special game state a large number of game balls can be won in the winning opening. The following configuration is known. In addition, in this type of gaming machine, after entering the special gaming state, a probability variation gaming state in which the winning probability of a big hit is higher than in the normal gaming state, or a gaming state in which a gaming ball enters the starting opening more easily than the regular gaming state, etc. It is also known that a game is added to diversify the game (see, for example, JP-A-2005-074175).

However, since the result of the lottery performed by entering the game ball into the starting opening determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state, the starting condition of the game whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state is Unless it is established, the production corresponding to the lottery result cannot be executed, and even if it has a holding function, there is a problem that it can not be made as a production for a game whose execution is suspended. ..

According to the gaming machine described in the characteristic 40, the continuous game constituted by the establishment of the starting condition a plurality of times as the specific game state can be executed by a plurality of types of patterns for which the privilege grant timing is different, and further, the privilege The grant time is displayed by the first grant time display means after the start condition of the unit game in which the privilege is granted is satisfied, and is displayed by the second grant time display means even before the start condition is satisfied. It Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the award of a privilege from an early stage before the start condition corresponding to the unit game at the time of the award is granted, or to increase the expectation for the award of the privilege in stages. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an effect associated with a continuous game, which is configured by a plurality of times of starting conditions being satisfied, such as executing an effect to be played.

<Characteristic 41>
In the gaming machine described in feature 40,
The specific game state control means stores, as the content of the unit game executed when the start condition is satisfied, at least a plurality of control patterns in which variable time setting conditions are different (main control board 920). ROM),
A gaming machine, wherein the specific game state is generated by controlling the unit game with a control pattern corresponding to the number of executions of the unit game from the start to the end of the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine described in Feature 41, by applying a plurality of control patterns to each unit game, it is possible to control at least the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the specific game state configured by a plurality of unit games. By combining the effect corresponding to the award time of the privilege and the variable time, the variable display with a long variable time is made to correspond to the award time of the award so that the player can easily pay attention to the unit game expecting the award time of the award. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the effect that suggests the privilege granting time.

<Characteristic 42>
In the gaming machine according to feature 40 or 41,
A unit game number storage unit that stores information corresponding to the number of times the unit game is executed in the specific game state,
Based on the information stored in the unit game number storage unit, when the starting condition is satisfied during the period when the execution of the unit game is suspended by the suspension means, the execution time of the unit game in which the starting condition is satisfied is executed. An execution timing deriving means for deriving (processing of S1805 to S1807 of the hold information output setting processing S1707),
The second grant timing display means displays information corresponding to the privilege grant timing according to whether the execution timing of the unit game derived by the execution timing deriving means corresponds to the privilege grant timing. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 42, the execution timing of the unit game for which the start condition is satisfied is derived based on the information corresponding to the number of times of execution of the unit game in the specific game state. Therefore, compared with the case where the number of times the unit game is scheduled to be executed, which corresponds to the execution time of the unit game for which the start condition is satisfied, and the number of times the unit game is in progress in the specific game state are managed separately. It is possible to reduce the storage area of the RAM used as the unit game number storage unit and reduce the possibility that the synchronization of the update of both times is lost.

<Characteristic 43>
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features 40 to 42,
The second grant timing display means displays information corresponding to the privilege grant timing before the execution of the specific game state is started (specific game pre-timing time display means (processing of S1908 and S1912 of hold information output setting processing S1707)). A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 43, it is possible to transmit information corresponding to the contents of the continuous game in the specific gaming state to the player or the manager of the game hall as needed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying the game playability of continuous games and suppressing fraudulent activities.

<Characteristic 50>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more easily established than a normal gaming state when a predetermined winning condition is established, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In the gaming machine configured as
A game ball can be distributed to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA), and an enterable state (guidance posture) in which the game ball can enter the specific area in at least part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) that can be generated,
A switching mechanism (upper prize winning apparatus 434, 1434) that is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and can switch whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side,
Operation control means for performing control including operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state (control unit of distribution mechanism 601, 1601 and main prize winning device 434, 1434 in the main control board 920) )When,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control unit (a game state control unit in the main control board 920) that generates a more advantageous specific game state than when the game ball does not enter the specific area. Prepare,
The operation control means, the game ball whose traveling direction is controlled by the switching mechanism passes through a predetermined region before the start of a predetermined round (specific round) in which the approachable state occurs, or a predetermined time A predetermined round start preparation condition including at least one of the elapsed time is satisfied, and after the round start preparation condition is satisfied, at least two different waiting times (“0.5 seconds” and “3”) are set. After the elapse of any one of the "0 seconds" interval time), the sorting mechanism is controlled to the enterable state to start the predetermined round,
As a special game state with a different waiting time, a first special game state (16R big hit (V non-win prize) special game state) and a second special game state (16R big hit with a longer waiting time than the first special game state) (V winning) special game state) is provided,
A gaming machine, wherein the probability that a game ball enters the specific area varies depending on the length of the waiting time.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows entry of a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player who plays a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a specific area. There is known a gaming machine that provides a gaming state that is advantageous to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, whether or not the game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area is determined by a substantially constant probability according to the operation of allowing the game ball to enter the variable winning device. However, there is room for improvement in the form in which the game ball enters the specific area.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 50, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately entering the game ball into a specific area where a gaming state advantageous for the player is generated. That is, since it is possible to change the probability that the game ball enters the specific area by changing the length of the waiting time before the start of the specific round, at least one of the control patterns by the operation control means for a plurality of types of special game states. While it is easy to make the parts common and simplify the control, the probability of entering the specific area can be easily made different. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the probability of the game ball entering the specific area that affects the transition of the game state while suppressing the cost increase of the game machine.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 50, passing through the switching mechanism may be through a position where the traveling direction of the game ball is switched by the switching mechanism, and the front side of the opening/closing member that stands up as the switching mechanism is played. This includes a case where the game ball does not come into contact with the switching mechanism, such as a ball flowing down, and a case where the game ball passes through a position that can come into contact when the switching mechanism operates.

<Characteristic 51>
In the gaming machine described in feature 50,
The operation pattern of the distribution mechanism and the operation end condition by the operation control means after the elapse of the standby time are the same, and the round is started according to the length of the standby time corresponding to the type of special game state. The timing at which the approachable state occurs after the preparation condition is satisfied is different, and the identification is performed by the distribution mechanism at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the switching mechanism reaches the distribution mechanism after the round start preparation condition is satisfied. A gaming machine, wherein the probability that a game ball enters the area varies depending on the length of the waiting time.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 51, even if the operation control of the distribution mechanism in the specific round is the same, the length of the waiting time before the start of the specific round is changed and the game ball enters the specific area. The probabilities can be different. Therefore, at least a part of the control pattern for permitting the game ball to enter the specific area by the operation control means for a plurality of types of special game states can be easily made common to further simplify the control. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the probability of the game ball entering the specific area that affects the transition of the game state while suppressing the increase in the cost of the game machine.

<Characteristic 52>
In the gaming machine according to feature 50 or 51,
The operation control means controls the first special game state and the second special game state with different lengths of the waiting time, from the start of the plurality of rounds until the end condition in each round is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that the operation patterns of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism generate special game states that are set to the same in the first special game state and the second special game state.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 52, the operation patterns from the start of a plurality of rounds in the first special game state and the second special game state to the end condition of each round being set are the same. Therefore, it is possible to further facilitate common control of a plurality of types of special game states having different probabilities of entering a specific area.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the feature 52, the start of a plurality of rounds may be a timing at which the game ball is allowed to enter a predetermined winning opening where the winning conditions are satisfied, and the predetermined winning opening is set. May be set to 1 or 2 or more.

<Characteristic 53>
In the gaming machine described in feature 52,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery (for example, jackpot symbol random number counter and jackpot symbol initial value random number counter),
With information display means (for example, special symbol display devices 471, 472 relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) for displaying display information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means,
The operation control means, when predetermined display information (stop symbol identification value) is stopped and displayed as the display information on the information display means, both the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state A gaming machine characterized by being set to generate.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 53, two kinds of special game states with different probabilities of whether or not the game ball enters the specific area are generated even if the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed by the information display means. .. Therefore, the game state transition control can be complicated and the game can be diversified without increasing the pattern of the display information corresponding to the winning of the predetermined lottery. Further, when the same display information is stopped and displayed, the operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism during the special game state can be easily made common, and the same type of display information is given to the player. The apparent value can be made substantially the same so that the player is less likely to be dissatisfied.

<Characteristic 54>
In the gaming machine described in feature 53,
The operation control means, when the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed on the information display means, from the satisfaction of the start condition of the game in which the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed until the end of the game. A gaming machine, characterized in that which of the first special gaming state and the second gaming state is executed is determined according to the type of gaming state at a predetermined timing.

According to the gaming machine described in the characteristic 54, when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed, the transition probability of the game state to be transferred after the special game state according to the game state at the predetermined timing in the variable display. However, different playability can be added. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine while diversifying the game state transition pattern, while suppressing an increase in the types of display information and complicated control of the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 54, the predetermined timing may be a timing at which a start winning is generated for a variable display in which predetermined display information is stopped and displayed, or a change in which predetermined display information is stopped and displayed. It may be the timing when the display is started, or the timing when the variable display in which the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed is ended.

Further, it is determined whether to execute the first special game state or the second special game state according to the type of the game state, and the first special game state is completely corresponding to the type of the game state. It may be determined which of the second special game states is to be executed, or which of the first special game state and the second special game state is to be executed according to the probability set in the type of game state. Alternatively, the one to be executed may be determined from a game state including a special game state different from the first special game state and the second special game state.

<Characteristic 55>
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features 50 to 54,
The distribution mechanism is provided in a flow-down path (a path leading to the entrance of the specific passage TA via the connection passage KD) that leads from the entrance of the game area to the specific area, and an entry into which the game ball can enter the particular area. It is a downstream side distribution mechanism (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) capable of shifting between a possible state and an inaccessible state in which the game ball does not enter the specific area,
The switching mechanism is provided on the upstream side of the downflow route with respect to the downstream distribution mechanism, at a position where at least a predetermined shortest downflow time is required between route separations, and the downstream side along the downflow route. It is an upstream side distribution mechanism (upper entry restriction mechanism 454, 1454 of upper prize winning apparatus 434, 1434) capable of shifting a flowable state in which a game ball can flow down to the distribution mechanism side and a non-flowable state in which it does not flow down,
As the operation control means,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the lottery related to the special symbol is won), the flow-out impossible period in which the upstream distribution mechanism is in the flow-down impossible state, and the upstream distribution mechanism after the flow-down impossible period An upstream-side control unit (a control unit of the upper entry restricting mechanisms 454, 1454) that generates the possible flow-down period in which the flow-down is possible;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the downstream distribution mechanism is set in a period including at least a preset enterable period after the shortest enterable period after the shortest downflow time has elapsed from the start of the downflow possible period. Downstream-side enterable control means (a control unit of the distribution mechanisms 601 and 1601 by the main control board 920) that controls the enterable state and allows the game ball to enter the specific area,
When the predetermined condition is met, the approaching state of the downstream sorting mechanism is generated in the approaching impossible period earlier than the approaching shortest time, and the shift is made to the approaching impossible state at a timing earlier than the approach possible shortest time. A gaming machine is characterized in that a downstream-side inaccessible control means (a control unit of the distribution mechanisms 601 and 1601 by the main control board 920) for disabling the game ball into the specific area is provided.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 55, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, even if the game ball enters the specific area by the control of the downstream-side approach control means, by the control of the downstream-side inaccessibility control means. Even if the game ball does not enter the specific area, both the upstream distribution mechanism and the downstream distribution mechanism operate, so there is a possibility that the game ball will advance to the specific area if a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to clearly indicate that something is present by the player's eyes.

In particular, even if the game ball does not enter the specific area by the control of the downstream-side inaccessible control means, the downstream-side distribution mechanism causes the enterable state. For this reason, the game ball flows down from the upstream distribution mechanism toward the downstream distribution mechanism that is in the enterable state, and it is possible to generate an opportunity for the player to pay attention to the behavior of the game ball. .. Therefore, the result of the lottery corresponding to the destination of the subsequent game ball can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the flow of the game ball can be used to suitably inform the player of the occurrence of an advantageous game state. Machine can be provided.

<Characteristic 56>
In the gaming machine described in feature 55,
As a game state in which the predetermined condition can be established, a plurality of game states including the advantageous game state are provided,
As the plurality of game states, the execution ratios of the downstream-side enterable control means and the downstream-side inaccessible control means when the predetermined conditions are satisfied are different, and the probability that the advantageous game state is generated is different. A gaming machine including states (a normal gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, and a time saving gaming state).

According to the gaming machine described in the characteristic 56, the probability that an advantageous game state occurs varies depending on the game state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, and thus it is advantageous to have an expectation according to the game state in execution. It can be expected that a gaming state will occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can bring a feeling of expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 55, the plurality of game states are different in any one or a combination of probability of satisfaction of a predetermined condition and ease of entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting area. It may have one or more game states.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the characteristic 56, display information is displayed as a result of whether variable display is executed and a predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball enters (first special symbol and second special symbol). ) Is set for a plurality of types, and a plurality of starting areas are set corresponding to each display information, in the case where a predetermined condition is satisfied according to the starting area into which the game ball enters in a plurality of game states. The execution ratios of the downstream-side approachable control means and the downstream-side inaccessible control means may be different, and the probabilities that a game ball enters the specific area and an advantageous game state occurs may be different.

<Characteristic 57>
In the gaming machine described in feature 56,
Whether or not entering is controlled by the upstream distribution mechanism, and an upper winning opening (upper prize opening 434A, 1434A) into which a game ball can enter when the upstream distribution mechanism is in the flow-down disabled state,
Whether or not entering is controlled by the downstream distribution mechanism, and a lower winning opening (lower large winning openings 433A, 1433A) into which a game ball can enter when the downstream distribution mechanism is in the entry enabled state. Equipped with
The specific area is configured to be accessible through the lower winning opening,
The upstream distribution mechanism is in a normal playable state in which a game ball can flow down to the downstream distribution mechanism side and is allowed to flow down, causing the flow-down impossible state in a part of the special game state to cause an upper flow. It is to enter the game ball into the winning opening,
The operation control means controls the operation of the upstream distribution mechanism and the downstream distribution mechanism according to the type of condition set as a plurality of types as the predetermined condition, and whether or not the game ball can enter the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by controlling.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 57, since the game ball enters the upper winning opening in the situation where the upstream distribution mechanism is in the flow-down impossible state, the specific region is located on the downstream route located on the downstream side. The firing operation can be adjusted depending on the situation in which a prize is generated in the upper prize hole. Then, the game ball can be entered into the specific area through the lower prize hole by simply continuing the firing operation in which the prize is generated in the upper prize hole. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player mistakenly performs the shooting operation to invalidate the generation of the advantageous game state.

<Characteristic 60>
A distribution mechanism (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) capable of distributing a game ball to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA) and capable of generating an enterable state in which the game ball can enter the specific area. ,
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the distribution mechanism (a control unit of the distribution mechanisms 601, 1601 by the main control board 920);
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control unit (a game state control unit in the main control board 920) that generates a more advantageous specific game state than when the game ball does not enter the specific area.
Provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism, a power failure ball holding means (ball carrier 602, which holds a game ball flowing down a downflow path leading to the specific area within a predetermined range when a power failure occurs A game machine having a movable projecting piece S1 to S5).

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows entry of a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player who plays a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a specific area. There is known a gaming machine that provides a gaming state that is advantageous to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the power supply to the inside of the gaming machine unexpectedly generated due to a power failure or the like is restored, the backup function causes the gaming machine to have almost the same state as when the power supply was stopped. Even if the control is returned from the above state, the player may be disadvantaged.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 60, a gaming machine capable of reducing the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage with respect to the entry of the gaming ball into a specific area that produces a gaming state advantageous to the player is provided. can do. That is, when a power failure occurs in the situation where the game ball that should have passed through the specific area is flowing down the downflow path leading to the specific area, the game ball is held within a predetermined range by the power holding ball holding means. be able to. Therefore, after the power of the gaming machine is restored, it is possible to restart the flow of the game ball toward the specific area and make it easier for the game ball to enter the specific area. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the person suffers a disadvantage.

<Characteristic 61>
In the gaming machine described in feature 60,
A game machine characterized in that the ball holding means at the time of power failure holds the game balls at a plurality of locations along the flow-down path.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 61, since the game ball can be held separately on the upstream side and the downstream side along the downflow path leading to the specific area, the downstream side flows down toward the specific area. It is possible to retain the game ball that has been played, and to prevent the game ball, which flows down on the upstream side after the timing of originally entering the specific area, from flowing down to the downstream side. Therefore, to save the situation of whether or not the game ball flows down to the specific area corresponding to the transition control of the game state decided before the power failure in the game area, and to facilitate the restoration of the flow down of the game ball after the power restoration. You can

<Characteristic 62>
In the gaming machine described in the feature 60 or 61,
Provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism, and provided with a switching mechanism (upper prize winning device 434, 1434, lower prize winning device 433, 1433) capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the specific area side,
A game machine characterized in that the ball holding means during power failure holds a game ball on the downstream side of the switching mechanism and on the upstream side of the sorting mechanism.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 62, it is possible to efficiently hold the game ball heading to the specific area only during the power outage by limiting the game ball flowing down to the distribution mechanism side by the switching mechanism, and it is determined before the power outage. It is possible to efficiently restore the flow down of the game ball corresponding to the game state transition control after a power failure.

<Characteristic 70>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more easily established than a normal gaming state when a predetermined winning condition is established, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In the gaming machine configured as
It is possible to distribute the game balls to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA), and to generate an enterable state in which the game balls can enter the specific area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (distribution mechanism 601, 1601),
A switching mechanism (upper major winning device 434, 1434, lower major winning device) provided on the upstream side or the downstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the winning area where the winning condition is satisfied. 433, 1433),
An operation control unit that controls the operations of the switching mechanism and the distribution mechanism to generate the special game state (a control unit of the upper prize winning devices 434, 1434 and the distribution mechanisms 601, 1601 on the main control board 920),
When the game ball is guided to the specific region, a game state control means (a game state control unit in the main control board 920) that generates a more advantageous specific game state than when the game ball is not guided to the specific region. Equipped with
A special game state including one or a plurality of rounds is provided before a predetermined round for generating the enterable state,
When the predetermined round is started, it becomes possible to reach the sorting mechanism across the time before and after the timing when the game ball reaches the sorting mechanism that is in the enterable state in the predetermined round. It is characterized in that it is provided with a firing continuation control means (a control section for the fifth round in which the allowable number of entries is different from that before the fourth round by the main control board 920) for performing control for continuing the firing of the game balls. Amusement machine.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows entry of a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player who plays a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a specific area. There is known a gaming machine that provides a gaming state that is advantageous to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, whether or not the game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area is determined by a substantially constant probability according to the operation of allowing the game ball to enter the variable winning device. However, there is room for improvement in the form in which the game ball enters the specific area.

Further, even if an advantageous situation occurs for a player who easily enters a game ball in a specific area, if the player does not perform a firing operation, the advantageous situation may be wasted. It is possible that some players will suffer disadvantages. That is, it is preferable to provide a game machine that allows a player to suitably perform a shooting operation in order to enter a game ball into a specific area, and there is still room for improvement.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 70, when a predetermined round for generating an enterable state in which a game ball can enter a specific area is started in at least part of a plurality of rounds, the game machine enters in the predetermined round. By the firing continuation control means, control for continuing the launch of the game ball so that it can reach the sorting mechanism from before the timing when the game ball reaches the sorting mechanism that is enabled is reached after the timing. Be seen. Therefore, in the special game state, the player intentionally stops the emission of the game ball at the timing when it is necessary to continue the emission of the game ball, and the distribution mechanism is set in the enterable state in a predetermined round. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player is disadvantaged because the ball does not reach.

<Feature 71>
In the gaming machine described in feature 70,
The firing continuation control means sets, for one or a plurality of rounds executed two or more times before the predetermined round, the allowable number of times that the winning condition of the round executed immediately before the predetermined round is satisfied. A game machine characterized by performing control for generating different special game states.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 71, the round executed immediately before the predetermined round has a different allowable number of times that the winning condition is satisfied with respect to the previous rounds, so that the player is Even if a game is played while counting the number of shot balls so as not to shoot more game balls than the number of times that is satisfied, it is easy to shoot extra game balls over the end of the previous round. Therefore, since it becomes easy for the player to continue the launch of the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the game area immediately after the start of the predetermined round, the situation where the game ball can reach the distribution mechanism immediately after the start of the predetermined round Can be easily generated, and a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage can be easily avoided.

In the gaming machine according to feature 71, a round in which the number of allowable wins for which the winning condition is satisfied is smaller than that of one or a plurality of rounds executed two or more times before the predetermined round. The allowable entry number of winning entrances to be established may be configured to be small, or the maximum entry allowable time may be configured to be short.

<Feature 72>
In the gaming machine according to feature 70 or 71,
The operation control means is to control the subsequent round after a predetermined interval time has elapsed during a plurality of rounds,
The firing continuation control means, before the execution of one or a plurality of rounds that are executed before the immediately preceding round, from the interval time before the execution of the immediately preceding round that is executed immediately before the predetermined round. A gaming machine characterized by performing control for generating a special gaming state having a longer interval time.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 72, the special game state in which the interval time before execution of one or more rounds executed before the immediately preceding round is longer than the interval time before execution of the immediately preceding round. Occurs. When the player feels that the interval time is long, it is easy to stop the firing of the game ball in order to suppress the wasteful firing of the game ball, and when the interval time is short, it is easy to continue the firing of the game ball without stopping the firing. .. For this reason, if the interval time is short before the execution of the immediately preceding round, it becomes easy to continue the firing of the game ball in an attempt to efficiently win the game ball in a predetermined round thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the game ball can reach the distribution mechanism immediately after the start of a predetermined round, and to avoid a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage.

<Feature 73>
In the gaming machine according to any one of features 70 to 72,
The player is provided with a launching means (launching device 330) for launching the game ball into the game area at a predetermined launch time interval by a predetermined launch operation.
The firing continuation control means sets an interval time before execution of one or a plurality of rounds, including before execution of a previous round executed immediately before for the predetermined round, as a predetermined time equal to or shorter than the firing time interval. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to generate a special game state.

According to the gaming machine described in feature 73, the interval time is set to a predetermined time that is equal to or shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, so even if the firing of the game ball is continued at that interval time, it is compared with the case where it is interrupted. Therefore, it is difficult to generate useless game balls that do not meet the winning conditions. Therefore, at least before the execution of the round immediately before the predetermined round, it is possible to suggest to the player in advance that there is a possibility that the game ball is in a special game state in which the useless emission of the game ball is suppressed even if the game ball is continuously emitted. can do. Therefore, it is easy for the game ball to continue to be launched from the end of the immediately preceding round to the start of a predetermined round, and it is easy for the game ball to reach the distribution mechanism, which causes the player to fail. It is possible to make it easier to avoid a situation where profits are incurred.

<Feature 80>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more easily established than a normal gaming state when a predetermined winning condition is established, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In the gaming machine configured as
A game ball can be distributed to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA), and an enterable state (guidance posture) in which the game ball can enter the specific area in at least part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) that can be generated,
A switching mechanism (upper prize winning apparatus 434, 1434) that is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and can switch whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side,
Operation control means for performing control including operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state (control unit of distribution mechanism 601, 1601 and main prize winning device 434, 1434 in the main control board 920) )When,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control unit (a game state control unit in the main control board 920) that generates a more advantageous specific game state than when the game ball does not enter the specific area.
Ejection abnormality detection means (right-handedness detection switch 603) for detecting whether or not a predetermined emission abnormality state is present,
Abnormality response control means for performing a predetermined abnormality response control when the predetermined emission abnormality state is detected by the emission abnormality detection means (timer update processing S1210 of the main control board 920, upper prize winning allowance processing S1309, The process of prohibiting winning a prize S1310) is provided,
As the special game state, a first special game state (a special game state of 16R jackpot (V non-win)) and a second special state in which the probability of a game ball entering the specific area is higher than in the first special game state. A game state (16R jackpot (V prize) special game state) is provided,
The abnormality response control means stops the progress of at least a part of the game when the predetermined emission abnormality state is detected by the emission abnormality detection means in at least a part of the second special game state, and the emission is started. A game machine characterized by performing control for advancing a game that has stopped advancing when an abnormal state is released.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows entry of a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player who plays a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a specific area. There is known a gaming machine that provides a gaming state that is advantageous to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if a state where the game ball can enter the specific area occurs, if the game ball is not normally fired at that timing, the opportunity for breakage becomes invalid and the player Could suffer disadvantages.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, a gaming machine capable of reducing the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage with respect to the entry of the gaming ball into a specific area that produces a gaming state advantageous to the player is provided. can do. In other words, when the game ball is not normally fired when the second special game state occurs, and at least one part of the game is stopped when the state becomes abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the game ball is not launched in a situation where the game ball can enter the specific area, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player who has been playing the game legally suffers a disadvantage. ..

<Characteristic 81>
In the gaming machine described in feature 80,
The firing abnormality detection means is a part of the game area, is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism, and includes a ball detection means capable of detecting passage of a game ball flowing down to the distribution mechanism side,
The game machine characterized in that the abnormality handling control means controls the progress of at least a part of the game in accordance with the result of detection of the game ball by the ball detecting means.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 81, the situation in which the game ball is not flowing down to the distribution mechanism side is appropriately detected, and when a predetermined abnormal firing state occurs, the control corresponding to the state is appropriately performed. Can be executed.

<Feature 82>
In the gaming machine according to feature 80 or 81,
A time information updating means for updating time information corresponding to the progress of the special gaming state,
The abnormality response control means, when the predetermined easy-to-win control is executed by the operation control means while the easy-to-win condition is being executed, detects the predetermined abnormal launch condition, and stops the easy-to-win control. At the same time, the update of the time information by the time information updating means is stopped, and the progress of at least a part of the game is stopped.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 82, by temporarily stopping the generation of the advantageous state for the player, the advantageous state for which the winning condition is easily established is longer than that of the other players. Without causing misunderstanding, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where a player who is playing the game legally suffers a disadvantage.

<Characteristic 90>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more easily established than a normal gaming state when a predetermined winning condition is established, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In the gaming machine configured as
A game ball can be distributed to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA), and an enterable state (guidance posture) in which the game ball can enter the specific area in at least part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) that can be generated,
A switching mechanism (upper prize winning apparatus 434, 1434) that is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and can switch whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side,
Operation control means for performing control including operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state (control unit of distribution mechanism 601, 1601 and main prize winning device 434, 1434 in the main control board 920) )When,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control unit (a game state control unit in the main control board 920) that generates a more advantageous specific game state than when the game ball does not enter the specific area.
Power failure detection means (a part of power failure monitoring processing S9202) for detecting whether or not a predetermined power failure state is present,
A power outage control means (each process of the main control board 920 when the power outage preparation flag is on) for performing a predetermined power outage corresponding control when the predetermined power outage state is detected by the power outage detection means,
As the special game state, a first special game state (a special game state of 16R jackpot (V non-win)) and a second special state in which the probability of a game ball entering the specific area is higher than in the first special game state. A game state (16R jackpot (V prize) special game state) is provided,
The power outage control means, when the predetermined power outage state is detected by the power outage detection means, in a predetermined period including a period for generating the approachable state, the special game state as the predetermined power outage response control A gaming machine characterized by executing a control for advancing.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows entry of a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player who plays a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a specific area. There is known a gaming machine that provides a gaming state that is advantageous to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if a state where a game ball can enter a specific area occurs, if a power failure occurs at that timing, the opportunity for turning becomes invalid and the player is disadvantageous. There was a possibility of suffering. Further, there is a possibility that a criminal may intentionally stop supplying power to the game machine and unjustly make a profit.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, there is provided a gaming machine capable of easily avoiding the inconvenience caused by the occurrence of a power failure with respect to the entry of the gaming ball into a specific area which produces a gaming state advantageous to the player. be able to. That is, even in a situation in which a predetermined power outage state has occurred, control for advancing the special gaming state is executed in a predetermined period including a period in which the enterable state is generated. For this reason, the game ball that should have entered the specific area will not enter the specific area due to the occurrence of a power outage, and the player who was playing the game legally will suffer disadvantages, and the criminal will intentionally generate the power outage. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a fraudulent act aiming to unfairly enter the game ball into the specific area is attempted.

<Characteristic 91>
The power outage control means, when the operation control means controls the generation of the approachable state, the approachable state is started before the approachable state is started even if the predetermined power failure state occurs. Time information updating means for updating time information corresponding to the progress of the special game state over a period until the end (updating process of special symbol related control timer of main control board 920 when power failure preparation flag is on) A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 91, even if a predetermined power outage occurs, the time information updating means can continue to update the time information for the period until the enterable state ends, so the specific region It is possible to suppress the influence of the occurrence of the power outage with respect to the entry of the game ball into the game ball, and it is possible to easily avoid the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the power outage.

<Characteristic 92>
Display means (decorative symbol display device 479) for displaying a result of a predetermined lottery including a lottery result regarding execution of the special game state,
Display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling display contents of the display means,
The power outage control means performs predetermined control including control of the display means by the display control means when the predetermined power outage occurs, and operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism by the operation control means. A game machine characterized by being stopped prior to a part of control including.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 92, it is possible to suppress the power consumption due to the display control of the display means, and distribute that portion to a part of the control including the control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the progress of the game in the special game state relating to the entry of the game ball into the specific area by using the limited electric power.

<Feature A0>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more easily established than a normal gaming state when a predetermined winning condition is established, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In the gaming machine configured as
A game ball can be distributed to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA), and an enterable state (guidance posture) in which the game ball can enter the specific area in at least part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) that can be generated,
A switching mechanism (upper prize winning apparatus 434, 1434) that is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and can switch whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side,
Operation control means for performing control including operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state (control unit of distribution mechanism 601, 1601 and main prize winning device 434, 1434 in the main control board 920) )When,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control unit (a game state control unit in the main control board 920) that generates a more advantageous specific game state than when the game ball does not enter the specific area. Prepare,
As the special game state, a first special game state (a special game state of 16R jackpot (V non-win)) and a second special state in which the probability of a game ball entering the specific area is higher than in the first special game state. A game state (16R jackpot (V prize) special game state) is provided,
In the case where the first special game state occurs, an entry suppression unit (ball transfer device 602, power failure monitoring process S9202, lower major winning device 2433) that suppresses entry of the game ball into the specific area is provided. Characteristic gaming machine.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows entry of a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player who plays a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a specific area. There is known a gaming machine that provides a gaming state that is advantageous to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when setting is made to generate a plurality of types of game states (special game states) in which the probability that the game ball enters the specific area is different, the game ball enters the specific area in each special game state. It is preferable that the probability of doing is a probability according to the setting of the manufacturer, and there is room for improvement in this respect.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature A0, in the special gaming state in which the probability that the game ball enters the specific area is set low, it is easy to avoid the situation where the game ball accidentally enters the specific area. Can be provided. That is, in the first special game state in which the probability that the game ball enters the specific area is lower than in the second special game state, the entry suppressing means suppresses the game ball from entering the specific area, so the first special game state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the maker side unfairly obtains a profit that is set so that the player cannot obtain such a situation.

<Feature A1>
In the gaming machine described in feature A0,
The operation control means, as a part of the second special game state, a advanceable period in which a predetermined number of game balls set to at least 2 can proceed to the side where the specific region is provided from the distribution mechanism. Is to generate
A game machine characterized in that the approach suppressing means causes a game ball to enter the specific area when the predetermined number or more of the game balls have advanced to the specific area side from the distribution mechanism in the advanceable period.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature A1, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific area only when the plurality of predetermined number of game balls have proceeded to the side where the specific area is provided by the distribution mechanism. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the specific area in a situation where one game ball accidentally advances to the specific area side from the distribution mechanism.

It should be noted that at least one feature described in Features 10 to A1 may be applied in combination with any other feature or multiple features. Below, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned respective features can be applied is shown.

Pachinko machine: A launching operation means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launching operation means, and a passage portion for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area. A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in a game area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating drum type gaming machines such as slot machines: The rotation of the revolving body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the revolving body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player is responsive to the pattern after the stop A gaming machine that gives benefits to.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for a game machine such as a ball game machine.

100... Gaming machine, 330... Launching device, 400, 1400... Gaming board, 433, 1433... Lower big prize device, 433A, 1433A... Lower big prize opening, 434, 1434... Upper big prize device, 434A, 1434A... Upper big Prize winning opening, 454, 1454... Top entry restriction mechanism, 471... Special symbol display device relating to first special symbol, 472... Special symbol display device relating to second special symbol, 479... Decorative symbol display device, 601, 1601... Shaking Minute mechanism, 602... Ball transfer device, 603... Right hitting detection switch, 920... Main control board, 940... Sub control board, 2433... Lower prize winning device, KD... Connection passage, S1-S5... Movable projecting piece, TA... Specific passage

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that there is room for improvement in the configuration for generating a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state .

Therefore, it is an object of the gaming machine according to the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably generating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player as compared with a normal gaming state .

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied,
Determination information display means for displaying information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means,
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific game start condition is satisfied, a combination of a plurality of unit games executed based on the satisfaction of a plurality of start conditions gives a player more than a normal game state. A gaming machine provided with a specific game state control means for generating an advantageous specific game state,
The specific game state control means is for generating a plurality of types of specific game states in which at least one of the content of the privilege to be given to the player and the giving time is different.
The determination means determines whether or not a specific game start condition set corresponding to a plurality of types of specific game states is satisfied,
The determination information display means displays information corresponding to a specific game state in which control is started by the specific game state control means in a unit game based on a start condition in which the specific game start condition is satisfied,
Before the specific game state is started, which of a plurality of types of specific game states is to be started is selected, and information corresponding to the specific game state to be executed is displayed by the determination information display means. I am trying.

With the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can favorably generate a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state .

Claims (1)

A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more easily established than a normal gaming state when a predetermined winning condition is established, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In the gaming machine configured as
A distribution mechanism capable of distributing game balls to a plurality of regions including a specific region and capable of generating an enterable state in which the game balls can enter the specific region in at least a part of the plurality of rounds,
A switching mechanism that is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and that can switch whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side,
An operation control means for performing control including operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control means for generating a more advantageous specific game state than when the game ball does not enter the specific area,
A power failure detecting means for detecting whether or not a predetermined power failure state is present,
A power failure control means for performing a predetermined power failure response control when the predetermined power failure state is detected by the power failure detection means,
Display means for displaying a result of a predetermined lottery including a lottery result regarding execution of the special game state,
Display control means for controlling display contents of the display means,
As the special game state, a first special game state and a second special game state in which the probability that a game ball enters the specific area is higher than that of the first special game state are provided.
The power outage control unit detects the power outage as the predetermined power outage response control in a predetermined period including a period in which the predetermined power outage state is detected by the power outage detection unit and causes the approachable state. Executing a predetermined control for advancing the special game state after the predetermined power failure state is detected by means,
When the predetermined power failure state is detected by the power failure detection means when the distribution mechanism is controlled to generate the approachable state, the control of the display means by the display control means is performed by the special game. It is possible to stop prior to the predetermined control for advancing the state, and after the predetermined control is performed, it is possible to stop the control of the control board that controls the shooting of the game ball. And the gaming machine.